Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
SERVICE MANUAL
002366MIU
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL
002366MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B202 DSc428 LD328c Aficio 3228C C2824
B178 DSc435 LD335c Aficio 3235C C3528
B180 DSc445 LD345c Aficio 3245C C4535
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 06/2005 Original Printing
B202/B178/B180
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ........................................................................1-3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ................................................................1-3
1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-4
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-4
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-6
1.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6
Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7
Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-12
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE..........................................................1-13
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT .....................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT....................................................1-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-20
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ..............................................................1-23
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-24
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ......................................1-27
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-27
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-30
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-34
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37
Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37
SM i B202/B178/B180
Rev. 06/2006
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray .....................................................1-38
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER .....................................................................1-39
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39
Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40
Main Body...........................................................................................1-41
Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-44
1.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION............................................1-48
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.....................................................1-48
ACCESSARY CHECK ........................................................................1-49
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................1-50
1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-55
1.5.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-57
1.5.12 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-59
1.5.13 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION) .......................................1-61
1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS................................................................................1-64
1.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................1-64
I/F Card Slot........................................................................................1-64
SD Card Slot.......................................................................................1-64
1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3..............................................................................1-65
1.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ........................................................1-66
1.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)..................................................................1-67
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-67
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-68
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-68
1.6.5 IEEE 1284 ......................................................................................1-69
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-69
1.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ...................................................1-70
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-70
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-72
SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN .............1-73
1.6.7 BLUETOOTH..................................................................................1-74
1.6.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ...............................1-75
Before You Begin The Procedure .......................................................1-75
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-75
Seal Check And Removal ...................................................................1-76
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-77
1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ........................................................1-79
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1
New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1
PM Counter Reset ................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-2
2.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-4
B202/B178/B180 ii SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
SM iii B202/B178/B180
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................3-29
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-32
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT .................................3-35
3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-36
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-36
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..................................................3-37
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit...............3-43
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-44
3.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD ..............................3-45
3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-45
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-46
3.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-47
3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..........................3-47
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-47
By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-47
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-49
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ...............................................3-50
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-50
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS .....................3-51
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................3-51
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH ..............................................................3-52
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-52
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-53
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-54
3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT .........................................................................3-54
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-55
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-56
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-58
When you reinstall the transfer belt ....................................................3-59
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-60
3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................3-61
3.12 FUSING .................................................................................................3-62
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-62
3.12.2 UPPER COVER............................................................................3-63
3.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR............3-64
3.12.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND FUSE .......................3-65
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-65
3.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP ....3-66
3.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-67
3.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER ......................................3-68
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-68
3.12.8 UPPER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS...........3-69
3.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS..........3-70
3.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ....................3-71
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-72
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-72
3.12.12 DRIVE GEAR .............................................................................3-72
3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-73
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-74
B202/B178/B180 iv SM
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-75
3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY .............3-75
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,
B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-76
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-76
3.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-78
When reassembling the HDD .............................................................3-78
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE .....................................3-79
NVRAM on the BCU ...........................................................................3-79
NVRAM on the Controller ...................................................................3-80
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-81
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-81
3.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-82
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ..........................................................................3-82
3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-83
3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-83
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-83
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY .................................................3-84
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K ....3-86
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-87
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-88
M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-88
C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-92
K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-93
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-1
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ...............................4-3
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE ...........................................................................4-8
4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................4-8
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ...........................................................4-8
SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ...........................................................4-8
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ...........................................................4-8
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-8
SP4-904-1 Register Access..................................................................4-8
SP4-904-2 Image Path .........................................................................4-8
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................................................4-10
4.3.1 SUMMARY .....................................................................................4-10
SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-11
4.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-12
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 .............................................................4-51
4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-51
Work-flow............................................................................................4-51
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2 .............................................................4-53
SM v B202/B178/B180
4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-53
Detailed Explanation ...........................................................................4-57
Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-62
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-64
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-66
How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-72
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-74
Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-74
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-74
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT .....................................................................4-77
Black Over Print Disabled ...................................................................4-77
Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-77
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-78
4.7.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-78
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-80
4.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-80
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...........5-1
Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-4
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-6
Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-6
Others ...................................................................................................5-7
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................5-8
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-8
SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-8
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-19
SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-35
SP4-XXX (Scanner) ............................................................................5-45
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-55
SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-83
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-86
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-97
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................5-134
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-136
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-137
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-137
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-137
B202/B178/B180 vi SM
Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-138
5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE .............................................................5-139
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-143
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-144
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-144
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ...........................................................................5-146
SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-146
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-146
5.5 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET ..................................................5-147
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-147
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ...................5-147
System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-147
Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-148
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-149
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................5-149
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..................................................................5-150
5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-151
5.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-154
5.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-155
5.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-156
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-156
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-156
5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-157
5.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-160
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-161
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-161
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-162
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-163
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-164
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-164
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-165
5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-166
5.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-166
5.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD .....................5-169
5.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-170
5.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-171
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-171
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-171
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-171
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-172
Controller Board................................................................................5-172
BCU Board........................................................................................5-172
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
SM vii B202/B178/B180
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB ..........................6-14
Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14
Adjustment Process ............................................................................6-14
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15
Overview.............................................................................................6-15
Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ............................6-16
Introduction .........................................................................................6-16
Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17
Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-18
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-18
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-19
6.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20
6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-20
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-21
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-22
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ..................................................6-23
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-24
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-24
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-25
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-25
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25
White Level Correction........................................................................6-25
Others .................................................................................................6-25
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-26
Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27
B202/B178/B180 viii SM
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-31
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-31
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-32
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-34
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-36
IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37
Copier Application...............................................................................6-37
Printer Application...............................................................................6-37
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-37
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-38
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-38
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-39
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-40
Overview.............................................................................................6-40
Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40
Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41
Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-43
Front and Upper Left Cover Switch.....................................................6-43
Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45
Overview.............................................................................................6-45
Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46
Adjustment Conditions ........................................................................6-47
Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-48
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-49
6.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-50
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Initialization Process and SC Codes ...................................................6-52
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-53
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55
Waste Toner Path ...............................................................................6-55
Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-56
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION ...............................6-57
SM ix B202/B178/B180
6.8 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-58
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-58
6.8.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-60
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-61
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-62
Overview.............................................................................................6-62
Toner Agitation and Attraction ............................................................6-62
Air Flow and Toner Flow .....................................................................6-63
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-63
Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-64
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-65
6.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-66
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-66
6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY .........................6-67
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-68
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-69
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-70
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ....................................6-70
6.9.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-71
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-72
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .......................................6-73
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-74
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-74
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .................................................................6-75
Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF ............................................................6-75
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF...................................................6-75
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT...........................................................6-76
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) ........6-77
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................6-78
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER ....6-79
With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...........................................6-79
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...............................6-79
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................................6-80
Drive ...................................................................................................6-80
Feed-in and feed-out...........................................................................6-80
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-81
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-81
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ............................................................6-82
Drive Motor .........................................................................................6-82
Transfer belt speed control .................................................................6-83
Transfer belt mark sensor ...................................................................6-84
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT................................................................6-85
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-86
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT ......................................................6-87
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-87
Transfer Belt Sensor ...........................................................................6-88
Copier ACS.........................................................................................6-88
Printer ACS.........................................................................................6-89
B202/B178/B180 x SM
6.12 FUSING .................................................................................................6-90
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-91
Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-91
Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-91
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-92
Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-92
Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-93
Overheat Protection ............................................................................6-93
6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-94
Overview.............................................................................................6-94
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-95
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-96
6.13 PAPER EXIT .........................................................................................6-97
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-97
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-98
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS .........................................................................6-99
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-99
6.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-101
Overview...........................................................................................6-101
Data Transfer....................................................................................6-101
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .....................................................6-102
RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-102
PCL5e/PCL6c Driver.........................................................................6-102
PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-103
CMS (Color Management System) ...................................................6-103
Gray Correction ................................................................................6-103
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-103
Gamma Correction............................................................................6-103
Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-104
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .......................................................6-104
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-105
Sample Print .....................................................................................6-105
Locked Print......................................................................................6-105
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING .........................................................................6-106
Related SP Modes ............................................................................6-106
Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-107
Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-108
Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-109
Stapling.............................................................................................6-109
Punching...........................................................................................6-110
6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-111
6.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ....................................6-112
6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY ...........................................................6-112
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten ...............................6-112
Overwrite timing ................................................................................6-112
SM xi B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 BASIC..................................................................................................7-1
1.2 PRINTER.............................................................................................7-4
1.3 SCANNER ...........................................................................................7-5
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-6
2.1 PAPER FEED......................................................................................7-6
2.2 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................7-7
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................7-8
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-9
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-9
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ........................................................................7-10
SCANNER ..........................................................................................7-10
Scanner Drivers ..................................................................................7-10
Scanner Utilities ..................................................................................7-10
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-11
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................7-13
5.1 ARDF.................................................................................................7-13
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT .......................................................7-14
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................7-14
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ...........................................7-14
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........................................7-15
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER ........................................................................7-16
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ..............................................................7-16
5.8 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION...............................................7-17
B202/B178/B180 xii SM
BOOKLET FINISHER B602
SEE SECTION B602 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM xiii B202/B178/B180
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up
period. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical
components as the copier starts operation.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
CAUTION
1. The NVRAM module installed on the controller has a lithium battery which
can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an
identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM.
Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
2. The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which
can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn
the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in accordance with local
regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the
organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are
non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser
beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
CAUTION CAUTION
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT
WHEN OPEN WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS< >PS<
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
POSITION 1
TAB
B712 FAX OPTION TYPE 3245
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
POSITION 2
TAB
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598
POSITION 3
TAB
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600
TROUBLESHOOTING
POSITION 4
TAB
TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599
BOOKLET FINISHER B602
PUNCH KIT B377
SERVICE TABLES
POSITION 5
TAB
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
POSITION 6
TAB
SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
1. INSTALLATION
Installation
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Ambient Humidity (%RH)
80%
70%
Recommended conditions:
15 to 25°C
30 to 70 %RH
54%
30%
15%
SM 1-1 B202/B178/B180/
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
[B]
[A] [C]
[D]
B178I902.WMF
CAUTION
1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
2. Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
B202/B178/B180 1-2 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
Installation
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS
SM 1-3 B202/B178/B180/
COPIER
1.3 COPIER
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ARDF
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V
2. Duplex unit
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V
3. Finisher
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V
B178I903.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-4 SM
COPIER
Installation
This flow chart shows the installation procedures.
Start
No
Yes
End
Install the punch unit.
No
No
B178I904.WMF
You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher.
A punch unit is for to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher.
SM 1-5 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before you move
the machine. Otherwise, the transfer belt and the black PCU can be
damaged.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Operating Instructions–System Setting................................1
2. Operating Manual–Copy Reference ....................................1
3. Operating Manual–Printer Reference ..................................1
4. CD-ROM–Printer/Scanner Driver.........................................1
5. CD-ROM–Operating Instructions .........................................1
6. Ferrite Core .........................................................................1
7. Paper Size Decal .................................................................1
8. Model Name Decal ..............................................................1
9. Operation Panel Indication Decal ........................................1
10. Energy Star Sticker............................................................1
11. Decal–Inkjet Caution..........................................................1
12. Decal–Copy Prohibition .....................................................1
14. External Tray .....................................................................1
15. Power Cord........................................................................1
16. Toner–Black ......................................................................1
17. Toner–Magenta .................................................................1
18. Toner–Cyan .......................................................................1
19. Toner–Yellow.....................................................................1
20. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth .........................................1
21. Cloth Holder.......................................................................1
22. NECR ................................................................................1
B202/B178/B180 1-6 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation Procedure
Installation
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you
do not remove the tape.
Put the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you will install an optional
paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time. Then install the copier and
other options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need
them in the future if you transport the machine to another location.
[A]
B178I502.WMF
B178I501.WMF
SM 1-7 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION
B178I506.WMF
[B]
8. Install the external tray [B].
B178I507.WMF
[D]
[C]
B178I508.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-8 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation
12. Attach the guide cover [B].
[B]
[A]
B178I509.WMF
SM 1-9 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT
If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:
• Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the
power supply.
• Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center
position, replace the breaker switch.
21. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and “” mark appears on the switch.
22. Turn the breaker switch to the right position first. Then turn it to the “On”
position (left position).
23. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the
initialization procedure. The Start button LED () turns green when this
procedure has finished.
NOTE: The machine makes a sound that is not the same as other machines in
the field. This is normal and there are no defective parts in the machine.
This sound is made by the drum drive motor.
24. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
25. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
26. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
27. Check that the circuit breaker works correctly.
B202/B178/B180 1-10 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation
Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has
made a service contract.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract (
SP5-045-001).
Item SP No. Function Default
Counting SP5-045-001 Specifies if the counting method used in “0”:
method meter charge mode is based on Developments
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can set this one time only.
You cannot change the setting
after you have set it for the first
time.
/11" x 17" SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is “No”: Single
double (Special Service doubled for 11" x 17" paper. counting
counting Program) NOTE: When you change this setting,
contact your supervisor.
Service Tel. SP5-812-001 Programs the service station fax
No. Setting through 004 number.
The number is printed on the counter
list when the meter charge mode is
selected. This lets the user fax the
counter data to the service station.
SM 1-11 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the
machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to
another floor. See section 1.4.3, “Transporting Machine” if you will use some
transport equipment.
The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray
or LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.
[A]
B178I511.WMF
[B]
B178I512.WMF
CAUTION: Reinstall the machine stands after you move the machine. The
machine can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you work
on the machine if you do not do this.
B202/B178/B180 1-12 SM
MACHINE INSTALLATION
Installation
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before you move
the machine. Otherwise, the transfer belt and the black PCU can be
damaged.
SM 1-13 B202/B178/B180/
MACHINE INSTALLATION
NOTE: 1) Make sure you do the Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line
Position Adjustment (SP5-993-002 after you move the machine. This
optimizes color line alignment.
2) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to
prevent color shifting.
B202/B178/B180 1-14 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
1 2 3 6 7
4 5
B601I929.WMF
SM 1-15 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips can be damaged.
B601I919.WMF
[A]
B601I103.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-16 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B601I921.WMF
[E]
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of
the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B601I007.WMF
SM 1-17 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B601I005.WMF
B601I923.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-18 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
1 2 3 6 7
5
4
B598I929.WMF
SM 1-19 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.
B598I002.WMF
[A] B598I103.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-20 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C] B598I901.WMF
[D]
[F]
B598I005.WMF
SM 1-21 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B598I904.WMF
B598I903.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-22 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1
2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M 4 x 10 ....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
1 2 3 6 7
5
4
B600I929.WMF
SM 1-23 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may be
damaged.
B600I002.WMF
[A]
2. Press the stopper [A]. Then pull out
the tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).
[B]
[C]
B600I004.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-24 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
4. Install the rear stand [A].
5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B600I901.WMF
[D]
[F]
B600I903.WMF
SM 1-25 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B600I904.WMF
B600I918.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-26 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Left stopper bracket .............................................................1
2. Right stopper bracket...........................................................1
3. Knob screw..........................................................................4
4. Stud screw...........................................................................2
5. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................2
6. Decal ...................................................................................1
7. Decal ...................................................................................1
1 2 3 4 5
6 7
B714I501.WMF
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
B714I502.WMF
SM 1-27 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[C]
[F]
B714I503.WMF
[A]
B714I504.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-28 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
B714I505.WMF
B714I506.WMF
SM 1-29 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
6
4 B599I926.WMF
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
[A]
B599I901.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-30 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-rail
holder [B].
4. Install the link-rail holder (with the
link rail) to the copier [C] (Long screw
x 2). [C]
[B]
[A]
B599I906.WMF
[D]
B599I907.WMF
SM 1-31 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A] B599I908.WMF
B599I902.WMF
B599I910.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-32 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm ..........................................................................1
3. Spring ..................................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................2
5. Step screw...........................................................................2
6. Hopper.................................................................................1
7. Spacer (2 mm) .....................................................................1
8. Spacer (1 mm) .....................................................................2
2 1
8
4
B178I515.WMF
5 6 7
SM 1-33 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug the power cord. If the two-tray
finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178I516.WMF
B178I517.WMF
1. Unpack the punch unit. Then remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped x 1).
B202/B178/B180 1-34 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
B178I518.WMF
[E]
B178I519.WMF
[D]
SM 1-35 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B178I520.WMF
[C]
[B]
B178I521.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-36 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Accessories Check List
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1
2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1
3. Tray .....................................................................................2
4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4
5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2
6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................1
7. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1
8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1
1 2 3 4
B178I522.WMF 5 6 7 8
SM 1-37 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[G]
[I]
[A] B178I524.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-38 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Q’ty
1. Regular tray .........................................................................1
2. Rail holder ...........................................................................1
3. Magnet catch–rear...............................................................1
4. Magnet catch–front ..............................................................1
5. Duplex-unit support .............................................................1
6. Rail joint...............................................................................1
7. Screw M4 x 12.....................................................................6
8. Screw M4 x 6.......................................................................8
9. Screw M3 x 14.....................................................................4
10. Rail ....................................................................................1
11. Stapler unit ........................................................................1
12. Staple cartridge .................................................................1
13. Pad ....................................................................................3
1 2 3 4
5
10
6
8 11
9
B602I912.WMF
13 12
NOTE: Make sure that you keep the pads. The pads are white and made of
Styrofoam.
SM 1-39 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[D]
[A] [C]
B602I901.WMF
B602I008.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-40 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Main Body
Installation
1. Remove all tape and padding.
B602I001.WMF
[A]
[B]
B602I902.WMF
[C]
B602I903.WMF
SM 1-41 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[C]
[B] B602I004.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-42 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to
the copier ( x 1).
B602I905.WMF
[A]
B602I907.WMF
[C]
[D] B602I908.WMF
SM 1-43 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
4
B602I512.WMF
[A]
B602I009.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-44 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[E]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D] [A]
B602I513.WMF
SM 1-45 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
B602I514.WMF
[C] B602I515.WMF
B602I516.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-46 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B602I517.WMF
[F]
[E]
B602I518.WMF
B602I911.WMF
SM 1-47 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
Location Requirement
Put the scanner on the right side of the mainframe as shown.
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the scanner is placed 660~724 mm above the floor.
2) Make sure that the scanner cable does not touch the floor.
3) Make sure to tell the user not to let the scanner cable get caught in
things such as a wheelchair.
G570I311.WMF
Requirement Conditions
Attach the platen cover option to the mainframe to cover the exposure glass.
Install the scanner on a solid base. Do not install the scanner in areas where the
unit can fall down when the ADF cover is opened.
Make sure you install the unit in areas that let the user get easy access to operate
the unit. Ask the customer what their requirements are before you install the unit.
B202/B178/B180 1-48 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
ACCESSARY CHECK
Installation
1. Exposure Glass Cleaner Holder..................................................... 1
2. Exposure Glass Cleaner ................................................................ 1
3. M3 x 6 screw.................................................................................. 12
4. M3 x 8 screw.................................................................................. 1
5. Ground screw................................................................................. 1
6. Core ............................................................................................... 2
7. Left support .................................................................................... 1
8. Right stay ....................................................................................... 1
9. Bracket........................................................................................... 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 8
G570I300.WMF
SM 1-49 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: This installation procedure uses the following symbols.
: Screws
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before you do the following procedure.
G570I301.WMF
[B]
G570I302.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-50 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
Installation
[D]
[C]
[B]
G570I303.WMF
[E]
5. Remove the DF connector cable [A] ( x 2, x1).
NOTE: Keep these screws. You will use these screws later.
6. Remove the connector bracket [B].
7. Disconnect the connector [C] of the IPU harness and release the clamp [D].
8. Remove the core [E] from the I/F cable.
NOTE: Keep this core. You will use this core later.
[L]
[G]
[K]
[F] [J]
[H]
[I] G570I304.WMF
9. Disconnect the I/F cable [F] from the IPU ( x 2). Then put it behind the ground
bracket [G] and to the left side.
10. Disconnect the harness [H] from the scanner unit to the scanner PSU ( x 3,
x 1). Then put this harness inside the scanner frame.
11. Connect the connector of the DF connector cable [I] to the scanner PSU.
12. Bind the IPU harness [J] and DF connector cable [I] with the clamp [K]. Keep
these in the machine.
13. Attach the connector bracket [L] to the scanner PSU to keep this bracket.
SM 1-51 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
G570I305.WMF
[F]
[E]
G570I306.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-52 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[A]
[D]
[B]
G570I307.WMF
[E] [C]
20. Put the I/F cable [A] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the core [B]
to the I/F cable.
21. Connect the I/F cable connector [C]. Then attach the cable holder [D] ( x 1)
and the ground [E] ( x 1) to the frame.
[F]
[I]
[H]
[G]
G570I308.WMF
22. Put the IPU cable [F] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the two
cores [G] to the IPU cable.
23. Connect the IPU cable connector [H] and attach the ground [I] ( x 1).
SM 1-53 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A] G570I309.WMF
24. Connect the PSU cable connector [A] and attach the ground [B]
(ground screw x 1).
25. Attach the scanner bracket [C] to the supports ( x 3) and the ground [D] ( x
1).
26. Install the duct ( x 2, x 1) and ground cable ( x 2).
[E]
G570I310.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-54 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
B178I542.WMF
[B]
2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off the 15 mm
tape. (0.6")
NOTE: You do not need the
smaller piece for the
installation.
B178I543.WMF
[D]
B178I544.WMF
SM 1-55 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT Rev. 09/2005
[A]
[D]
62 mm
(2.4")
[C]
[B]
B178I545.WMF B178I546.WMF
The view from the back The view from the top
[E]
B178I547.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-56 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
B178I542.WMF
[F]
2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]
( x 2).
3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3). [C]
4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with
the left scale [E] ( x 2). [E]
[B]
NOTE: You do not have to remove the
ARDF exposure glass. Put the
glass marker [F] at the rear-left
corner when you reattach it if
the glass is removed.
[D]
B178I548.WMF
SM 1-57 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
B178I549.WMF
[B]
[D]
7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rear
frame.
8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
9. Connect the connector [D]. [C]
10. Reassemble the copier.
B178I550.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-58 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
2. After you cut the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom
corner of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edges
can hurt the user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through this
rectangular opening.
[B]
B178I565.WMF
[C]
B178I566.WMF
SM 1-59 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[C]
7. Align the caution decal [A] with the
mark [B] on the front of the heater [A]
cover [C]. Then attach the caution
decal at this location.
[B] B178I555.WMF
[F]
[E]
B178I567.WMF
[G]
B178I552.WMF
On
Stand by
B178I557.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-60 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION)
[B]
G570I351.WMF
[D]
G570I352.WMF
[F]
[I] G570I353.WMF
SM 1-61 B202/B178/B180/
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[C]
[D] [A]
G570I354.WMF
[E]
[F]
1
2 [G]
G570I355.WMF
B202/B178/B180 1-62 SM
OPTIONAL UNIT
[F]
Installation
[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[A] G570I356.WMF
17. Remove the scanner bracket [A] of the scanner accessibility option ( x 4).
NOTE: If the scanner accessibility option has not been installed, do the
procedures for installing the scanner accessibility option (
1.5.9)
before this step.
18. Remove the plate [B] in the scanner.
19. Put the cable [C] from the anti-condensation heater through the opening [D] of
the scanner bracket.
20. Connect the connector [E] of the cable to the connector [F] of the copier.
21. Attach the ground cable [G] ( x 1).
22. Attach the scanner bracket [A] ( x 4).
23. Attach the rear cover ( x 6).
SM 1-63 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS
B178I561.WMF
SD Card Slot
• Slot 1 is used for the standard printer/scanner application only.
• Slot 2 is used for one of the optional applications such as postscript 3 or data
overwrite security.
• Slot 3 is used for service only.
B202/B178/B180 1-64 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3
Installation
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
[B] B178I532.WMF
[C]
B178I533.WMF
SM 1-65 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I535.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot B [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B202/B178/B180 1-66 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I536.WMF
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
SM 1-67 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS
B202/B178/B180 1-68 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I537.WMF
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).
2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
SM 1-69 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS
[A]
[B]
B178I538.WMF
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B202/B178/B180 1-70 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A] B178I539.WMF
3. If the extended antennas (option) are to be installed, pull off the edge connector
protector [A] and discard it.
4. Insert the card [B] into the PCMCIA slot. Make sure the card label faces to the
front of the machine.
5. Use the provided double-sided tape to install the antennas [C] on the left rear
corner of the machine.
NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").
Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine and
disconnect them before you move the machine.
6. Put the antennas through the hole in the cover [F].
7. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].
8. Coil the cables [E]. Then hang them over the antennas as shown.
9. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).
10. You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of
equipment that generates strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
SM 1-71 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS
B202/B178/B180 1-72 SM
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
Press “Yes” to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SM 1-73 B202/B178/B180/
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.6.7 BLUETOOTH
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B178I540.WMF
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
3. Insert the Bluetooth card [C] into the slot in the interface board.
4. Press the antenna [D] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [E].
B202/B178/B180 1-74 SM
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
Before You Begin The Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
z Supervisor login password
z Administrator login name
z Administrator login password
If any of these settings are at a factory default value, tell the customer these
settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
Accessory Check
The B202/B178/B180 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description Q’ty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
SM 1-75 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER OPTIONS Rev. 06/2006
⇒
Seal Check and Removal
[A] B735I901.WMF
[B] B735I903.WMF
3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see “VOID” written on the box under
the tape [B]. This is normal.
4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option
is replaced due to a failure.
CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.
B202/B178/B180 1-76 SM
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS
⇒Installation Procedure
Installation
CAUTION
The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnected
before you do this procedure.
NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2.
However, the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card
slot 2. You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the
postscript option installed and you want to install the data overwrite
protection unit. Move the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) to
the SD Card that contains the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1).
(
5.7).
1. If the machine is ON, turn the
operation switch and the main
power switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect
the network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
[A]
4. Turn the SD-Card face [B] to the
rear of the machine. Then push it
slowly into Slot 2 until you hear a
click.
5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect the
network cable.
6. Turn the main power switch ON.
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup). B735I111.WMF
[B]
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
SM 1-77 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER OPTIONS Rev. 06/2006
⇒
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
z [A]: “ROM Number/Firmware Version” – “HDD Format Option”
z [B]: “Loading Program” – “GW1a_zoffy” (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)
“Loading Program” – “GW2a_zoffy” (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report: “ROM No. / Firmware “Loading Program” [B]
Version” [A]
Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option: GW1a_zoffy:
Unit Type C B7355050 / 0.04 B7355050 / 0.04
Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option: GW2a_zoffy:
Unit Type D B7355060 / 0.03 B7355060 / 0.03
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
firmware is upgraded.
• If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
¾ Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B202/B178/B180 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D.
¾ If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the “Data Overwrite Security Unit” (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
[C]
B202/B178/B180 1-78 SM
Rev. 06/2006 PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
14. Exit User Tools.
15. Power the machine OFF/ON.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
• The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
• “Next Copy” is displayed for a short time under the icon.
• The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
SM 1-79 B202/B178/B180
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SETTINGS
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 SETTINGS
New Unit Set
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace these units:
Maintenance
• PCU–K (SP5-999-001) • Development Unit–Y (SP5-999-006)
Preventive
• PCU–Y (SP5-999-002) • Development Unit–M (SP5-999-007)
• PCU–M (SP5-999-003) • Development Unit–C (SP5-999-008)
• PCU–C (SP5-999-004) • Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
• Development Unit–K (SP5-999-005)
Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):
1. Start the SP mode (
5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP5-999-001 to 009.
3. Select “1. Enable.”
4. Select “OK.”
5. Quit the SP mode.
6. Turn the main switch off.
7. Replace the unit.
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.
PM Counter Reset
Reset the counter (SP7-804) after you replace these units:
• By-pass tray (SP7-804-011) • Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
• Tray 1 (SP7-804-012) • Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
• Tray 2 (SP7-804-013) • Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804-
• Tray 3 (SP7-804-014) 018)
Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):
1. Start the SP mode (
5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP7-804-011 to 018.
3. Select “EXECUTE.”
4. Quit the SP mode.
SM 2-1 B202/B178/B180
PM TABLES Rev. 09/2005
2.2 PM TABLES
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
⇒
Fusing
2.1
Pressure Roller R R
⇒ Fusing Roller
Heat Roller
R
R
R
R
Pressure Cleaning Roller R R
Oil Supply Roller R R
Fusing Belt R R
Pick-off Pawl Ass’y R R
Stripper Pawls C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Pressure Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Heating Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Spurs C C Dry cloth; alcohol
Paper Path
Registration Sensor C C Blower brush
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller C C Damp cloth
Transport Roller C C Damp cloth
Inverter Sensor C C Blower brush
Miscellaneous
Distributed with
Dust Filter R R development unit-K
Breaker I I
Tray
Feed rollers R R
Pick-up Rollers R R
Separation Rollers R R
B202/B178/B180 2-2 SM
PM TABLES
ARDF
Item 240K EM Remarks
Pick-up Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Feed Belt R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Separation Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol
Sensors C C Blower brush
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Maintenance
Preventive
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol
LCT
Item 150K EM Remarks
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
Feed Rollers R Damp cloth
Pick-up Rollers R Damp cloth
Separation Rollers R Damp cloth
Two-Tray Finisher
Items 240K EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I Replace if required.
SM 2-3 B202/B178/B180
OTHERS
Booklet Finisher
Item 60K EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Shafts C Damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger fences I
2.3 OTHERS
NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes are
relatively long.
Copier
Item 150K 250K 500K 1000K Remarks
Transfer
Transfer Unit R
2.1
Belt Cleaning Unit R
2.1
Bypass Tray
Feed Roller R
2.1
Pickup Roller R
2.1
Separation Roller R
2.1
LCT
Item 150K 250K 500K 1000K Remarks
Relay Roller R
Bottom Plate Pad R
B202/B178/B180 2-4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
SPECIAL TOOLS
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do the
procedures in this section.
Replacement
Adjustment
B6456700 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1
and
B6456800 USB Reader/Writer 1
A029 9387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel NOTE 1
C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1
A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1
G5885140 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1
SM 3-1 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
A: Sub-scan magnification
B178R505.WMF
B178R506.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-2 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Press the “SP Mode” key to go back to the SP mode. Then open SP4-932.
and
Compare the current values with this table.
SP4-932-1 Dot Position correction R left edge
SP4-932-2 Dot Position correction R right edge
SP4-932-3 Dot Position correction B left edge
SP4-932-4 Dot Position correction B right edge
SM 3-3 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration
B
B178R507.WMF
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
B178R508.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-4 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
B
Make sure that the registration is
adjusted within the adjustment standard Feed direction
range as shown below. A
Image Area
Replacement
Adjustment
A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6") B178R509.WMF
Leading Edge
and
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode
(SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit,
LCT, and duplex unit.
Adjustment Standard
• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 ± 0 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 0 mm
SM 3-5 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP5-997.
2. Print out the pattern (trimming pattern) with SP5-997.
NOTE: Registration can change slightly as shown above. Print some pages of
the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge
and side-to-side registration values and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
B202/B178/B180 3-6 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
Copy Mode
and
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
The adjustment uses only “Offset” values.
NOTE: Never change “Option” values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
ID max
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
Offset
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
SM 3-7 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
B178R510.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-8 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select “Copy SP.”
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( the
table below).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
- Photo Mode, Full Color -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R968.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R969.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R970.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
4 on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
B178R971.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
B178R9
72.WMF seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, do
steps 1 to 4 again.
SM 3-9 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R977.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R978.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R979.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
B178R9
80.WMF on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
B202/B178/B180 3-10 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
ID max: Adjust the offset value so that
1 (K) the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
B178R981.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
2 the density of level 6 matches
that of level 6 on the C-4 chart.
B178R982.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
3 the density of level 8 matches
that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.
B178R983.WMF
Adjust the offset value so that
dirty background does not show
B178R9
84.WMF on the copy and the density of
Replacement
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
Adjustment
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
and
NOTE: Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust
“shadow” as shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at
each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of “shadow”
again until it is.
SM 3-11 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
• 1200 x 1200 photo mode
• 600 x 600 text mode
• 1800 x 600 text mode
• 600 x 600 photo mode
• 1800 x 600 photo mode
• 1200 x 1200 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61
Shadow SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Middle SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64
Adjustment Procedure
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select “Printer SP”.
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine
the image quality for these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown following table lists. Compare
the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in this order: “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”,
“Highlight”.
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.
B202/B178/B180 3-12 SM
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
and
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 -
K Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 -
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13
C Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 14 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 15 16 -
M Test 1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
sheet 600 x 600 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
Text 1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 13 14 16 -
1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 13 16 -
C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 1 3 4 9 11 12 14 15 16 -
Photo 1800 x 600 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
Y 1200 x 1200 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
Test
sheet 14/
600 x 600 1 2 5 8 10 11 14 15 16
15
Text
1800 x 600 1 3 6 9 10 12 14 15 16 -
1200 x 1200 1 2 4 7 9 10 13 15 16 -
SM 3-13 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT
[A] B178R511.WMF
[A]
B178R512.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-14 SM
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R513.WMF
[D]
B178R514.WMF
[E]
B178R515.WMF
SM 3-15 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT
[B]
B178R516.WMF
[A]
B178R517.WMF
[B] [A]
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2
B178R518.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-16 SM
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
[B]
[A] [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R519.WMF B178R520.WMF
B178R521.WMF
[B]
SM 3-17 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
[A]
B178R522.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-18 SM
EXTERIOR COVERS
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
B178R523.WMF
[B]
B178R524.WMF
SM 3-19 B202/B178/B180
EXTERIOR COVERS
[A] B178R525.WMF
[B]
CAUTION: Do not put things on the operation panel. The operation panel can
become unstable when you remove the upper front cover.
[E]
B178R905.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-20 SM
EXTERIOR COVERS
[D]
[C]
[F]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[B]
B178R527.WMF
SM 3-21 B202/B178/B180
EXTERIOR COVERS
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B178R528.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-22 SM
SCANNER UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R529.WMF
B178R530.WMF
SM 3-23 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT
B178R531.WMF
[B]
5. Sensor board unit
[B] ( x 5, x 4)
NOTE: Connect the connectors to
the SBU holding the SBU
with your hand when you
replace the SBU.
B178R532A.WMF
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
• SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag)
• SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.)
• SP4–011 (Main Scan Mag)
• SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment)
• SP4–800 (DF: Density Correction for R, G or B)
B202/B178/B180 3-24 SM
SCANNER UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R633.WMF
Input the barcode numbers with following SPs. These barcode numbers are printed
on the paper that is provided with the SBU.
Adjusting the gray valance level for each color
Input "4" with SP4-885: Level Convert Adjustment for R
Input "5" with SP4-886: Level Convert Adjustment for G
Input "6" with SP4-887: Level Convert Adjustment for B
Adjusting the printer vector correction
Input "7" with SP4-540-001: Printer Vector for R: Option
Input "8" with SP4-540-002: Printer Vector for R: Red
Input "9" with SP4-540-003: Printer Vector for R: Green
Input "10" with SP4-540-004: Printer Vector for R: Blue
Input "11" with SP4-540-021: Printer Vector for M: Option
Input "12" with SP4-540-022: Printer Vector for M: Red
Input "13" with SP4-540-023: Printer Vector for M: Green
Input "14" with SP4-540-024: Printer Vector for M: Blue
SM 3-25 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT
[B]
B178R534.WMF
[C]
[D]
B178R535.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-26 SM
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling
• When you reassemble the xenon lamp,
make sure that the bind is positioned and
the cable that has a black tube is run on
Replacement
the cable guide as shown [E].
Adjustment
and
[E]
B178R536.WMF
OK
NG
B178R536A.WMF [F]
SM 3-27 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT
B178R537.WMF
Reassembling [A]
B202/B178/B180 3-28 SM
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
and
B178R539.WMF
B178R540.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick
the wire to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the
assembly at the time of installation.
SM 3-29 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT
B178R541.WMF
[A]
B178R542.WMF
[F]
B202/B178/B180 3-30 SM
SCANNER UNIT
[D]
7. Remove the tape from the [A]
[I]
drive pulley.
8. Insert a scanner-positioning
pin [A] through the 2nd
carriage hole [B] and the left
holes [C] in the front rail.
[G]
Insert another scanner
positioning pin [D] through
the 1st carriage hole [E] and
the right holes in the front rail
[F]. [H]
[B] [E]
9. Insert two more scanner
positioning pins in the holes
Replacement
Adjustment
in the rear rail.
[C] [F] B178R543.WMF
and
10. Screw the drive pulley to the
shaft [G].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the
positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
SM 3-31 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT
[S1] [S3]
[A]
[S2]
[C]
[B]
[D] B178R544.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-32 SM
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[D]
B178R545.WMF
SM 3-33 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER UNIT
NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you do this. Attach the wire
to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the
time of installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner
should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front.
This must show as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three
windings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must
face the rear.
6. Do steps 7 through 13 again in the “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”
Section.
B202/B178/B180 3-34 SM
SCANNER UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R548.WMF
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press ).
3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark .
B178R549.WMF
SM 3-35 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS
WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS<
CAUTION.WMF
CAUTION
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
VORSICHT B178R550.WMF
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
>PS<
CAUTION2.WMF
WARNING
Make sure you turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet before you disassemble or adjust the laser unit. This
machine uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an
output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
B202/B178/B180 3-36 SM
LASER OPTICS
CAUTION: Remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit before you
install the new laser optics-housing unit.
Steps 1 through 4 show the procedure [A]
for a newly supplied unit that replaces
the current one.
1. Top cover of the laser optics
housing unit [A] ( x 4) [B]
2. Sponge padding [B] [C]
3. Tag [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Reinstall the top cover.
and
B178R551.WMF
[E]
B178R552.WMF
9. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover ( 3.5.1)
10. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rear
cover ( 3.5.3)
SM 3-37 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS
[A]
B178R553.WMF
CAUTION: 1) Make sure that the cables on the rear of the scanner unit are not
caught on anything before you go to the next step. The whole
function (not only the scanner unit) can be disabled if some of the
cables are damaged.
2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment can be difficult if you remove these
screws.
B178R554.WMF [E]
[S3]
B202/B178/B180 3-38 SM
LASER OPTICS
[A]
13. Securing screws for the paper exit tray
[A] ( x 2)
NOTE: Do not remove the paper exit
tray at this time.
Replacement
Adjustment
B178R555.WMF
and
14. Securing screws for the toner supply
unit [B] ( x 4) [B]
15. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [C] ( x 2)
[C]
B178R556.WMF
[B]
[E] 2
B178R557.WMF
SM 3-39 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS
[A]
B178R558.WMF
[B]
18. Connector cover [B] ( x 3)
19. Three connectors [C] ( x 1)
[C] B178R909.WMF
[D]
B178R913.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-40 SM
LASER OPTICS
When reassembling the laser optics housing unit, follow the notes below.
[A] [C]
OK NG
OK
[D]
[B]
NG
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R908.WMF
Make sure that the clamp [A] is positioned between two binds [B] and the harness
[C] is not bound by the clamp [D].
[E]
[F]
Rear view
B178R910.WMF
When you connect the harnesses from laser optics housing unit to the BCU, make
sure that the binds [E] are positioned and the binds [F] are positioned as diagram
shows.
Enter the SP mode and set "Disable" with SP2-920-1 after you replace the Laser
optics housing unit.
SM 3-41 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS
[A]
22. Duct [A]
23. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [B] ( x 2)
24. Put a sheet of paper [C] between the
laser optic housing unit and the machine [B]
rear frame.
NOTE: This does not let the cables be
caught by the brackets when you [C]
lift the laser optics-housing unit.
25. Hold the unit with both hands and slowly
lift it up. Make sure that the cables from
the laser diode board are not caught by
the brackets when you do this.
NOTE: The cables can be caught by the B178R561.WMF
Do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance >
Color Registration > Auto Color Registration > OK) after you install the laser optics-
housing unit.
B202/B178/B180 3-42 SM
LASER OPTICS
Replacement
Adjustment
Decal 2 Decal 3
and
Decal 1
NOTE: You do not need to input the values on decals 2 and 3. The machine
does the main scan registration correction for each color at the time of
automatic line position adjustment.
4. Print out the following test pattern (Cross Stitch M) with SP5-997.
5. Check these test patterns. Vertical black strips show if the laser beam pitch is
not correct.
• Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (no
striping effect should show on the printout).
6. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and 3 until the printout is
correct. Refer to the illustration shown below:
Feed direction
SM 3-43 B202/B178/B180
LASER OPTICS
[A] [C]
1. Laser optics housing unit
( 3.7.2)
2. Top cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Harness cable on the polygon-mirror-
motor drive-board [B]
4. Twelve connectors [C] on the four LD
boards
[B]
B178R566.WMF
B178R567.WMF
[E]
6. Air-current rectifier [E] ( x 3)
7. Polygon mirror motor [F]
( x 4, x 1)
[F]
B178R568.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-44 SM
LASER OPTICS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
B178R569.WMF
and
3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS
[A]
B178R570.WMF
SM 3-45 B202/B178/B180
PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
B178R572.WMF
B178R573.WMF [F]
B202/B178/B180 3-46 SM
PAPER FEED
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
[C] B178R574.WMF
[A]
[C]
By-pass Tray
1. Open the right door.
2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook, x
1)
3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator
[B].
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)
[B]
B178R575.WMF
SM 3-47 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
B178R576.WMF
[E]
B202/B178/B180 3-48 SM
PAPER FEED
[D]
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[C]
B178R577.WMF
[E]
B178R578.WMF
SM 3-49 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
B178R579.WMF
B178R580.WMF
[A] [B]
B178R581.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-50 SM
PAPER FEED
[B]
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R582.WMF
B178R583.WMF
1. Paper trays
2. Rear cover ( 3.5.1) [B] [A]
[D] [C]
B178R584.WMF
SM 3-51 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
[B]
[C]
B178R587.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-52 SM
PAPER FEED
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
B178R588.WMF
SM 3-53 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
NOTE: Grasp the central areas of the front and rear frame when you remove or
install the transfer unit.
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the entrance mylar [B].
Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-17). Then do the output check, (SP5-
804-66) after you replace the transfer unit.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178R589.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-54 SM
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
NOTE: Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-18) after you replace the
transfer belt-cleaning unit.
Replacement
2
Adjustment
and
[A]
1
[B]
B178R590.WMF
Pull out the transfer belt-cleaning unit [A] ( x 1) at the same time you push the
lever.
NOTE: 1) The blade [B] can damage the belt if you do not continue to push the
lever.
2) Make sure that the transfer unit release lever is put back to the original
position ( 3.8) when you reassemble.
SM 3-55 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
[A]
[B]
B178R591.WMF
[D]
[E] [F]
[C] B178R592.WMF
4. Lever [C]
5. Ground plate [D] ( x 1)
6. 3 gears [E] ( x 1)
7. Gear box [F] ( x 1)
B202/B178/B180 3-56 SM
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R593.WMF
SM 3-57 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt. Hold the belt at its end position when you
replace the belt.
[A]
[B]
B178R594.WMF
[C]
[D] [E]
B178R595.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-58 SM
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
[C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R575A.WMF
[B]
B178R632.WMF
Do the same procedures mentioned in 3.10.1 after you replace the transfer belt.
SM 3-59 B202/B178/B180
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
[B]
[A]
B178R597.WMF
[C]
[D]
B178R598.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-60 SM
ID SENSORS
3.11 ID SENSORS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R599.WMF
SM 3-61 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
3.12 FUSING
CAUTION
Be careful when you handle the fusing unit. It is very hot.
[A]
B178R173.WMF
1. Start the SP mode. Then execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).
2. Turn the main switch off.
3. Detach the finisher from the copier if it is installed.
4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
5. Open the upper left cover. Then pull it out.
6. Fusing unit [A]
7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.
If the customer uses thick paper, make some test prints on a sample of the paper
used by the customer after you replace the fusing unit. Adjust the line speed for
thick paper with the following SP if there are any color registration problems:
• SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed–[K] L Thick)
B202/B178/B180 3-62 SM
FUSING
[C]
[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R001.WMF
SM 3-63 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
[A]
[B]
B178R002.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-64 SM
FUSING
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
B178R004.WMF
[B]
[E] [C]
[D] B178R017.WMF
Reassembling
Make sure that the white part of both fuses [E] face the front direction of the
machine.
SM 3-65 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B178R009.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-66 SM
FUSING
[A] [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[B]
B178R010.WMF
[E]
[D]
B178R011.WMF
SM 3-67 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
[A]
[B]
[C]
B178R011.WMF
Reassembling
Do the following procedures when you reassemble this unit:
• Apply grease to the roller shaft bearing of the pressure roller frame.
• Make sure that the edges of the bushings are positioned inside the shaft
bearings.
B202/B178/B180 3-68 SM
FUSING
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B178R003.WMF
SM 3-69 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
[B]
[A]
B178R006.WMF
[E]
[C] [D]
B178R007.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-70 SM
FUSING
[B]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
and
[B]
B178R008.WMF [A]
SM 3-71 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
[B]
[A]
[C]
B178R013.WMF
Reassembling
Apply grease to both ends of the pressure roller shaft when you reassemble this
unit.
[A]
B178R014.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-72 SM
FUSING
CAUTION
Make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction when you reinstall it.
The arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to the
same direction.
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
and
B178R600.WMF
[C]
B178R601.WMF
SM 3-73 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
[C]
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT
[B]
B178R938.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-74 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[C]
B178R911.WMF
[E]
5. Duct [D] ( x 1, x 2) [D]
B178R603.WMF
SM 3-75 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
B178R604.WMF
NOTE: 1) Print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) before
you replace the BCU or controller.
2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new board
after you replace the BCU or controller.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A] B178R605.WMF
1. Controller [A] ( x 3)
2. IPU [B] ( x 2, x 2)
3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)
4. Rear cover [D] ( 3.5.1)
B202/B178/B180 3-76 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R606.WMF
[B]
8. BCU [C] (All 's, x 8)
[C]
[D] B178R607.WMF
CAUTION: 1) Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static
electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data.
2) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. Attach the
NVRAM with the "half-disk” [D] heading down to the NVRAM slot.
3) Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old board are the
same for the new board ( 5.11) when you replace the BCU.
NOTE: 1) Make sure you print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging
Data”) before you replace the NVRAM.
2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new board
after you replace the BCU or controller. Replace the NVRAM ( 3.13.5)
if the NVRAM on the old board is defective.
SM 3-77 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.13.4 HDD
You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. The
controller does not recognize the hard disk drive if you separate it.
1. Controller ( 3.13.3)
2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)
[A] B178R608.WMF
B178R015.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-78 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Replacement
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
Adjustment
and
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. Select a paper-size type ( SP5-131-001).
10. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the device
number and destination code.
2) SC 999 or “Fusing Unit Setting Error” can be show until the device
number and destination code are correctly programmed.
11. Turn the main switch off and on.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have
successfully copied them to the SD card.
13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 3.
14. Turn the main switch on.
15. Reset the settings for meter charge ( SP5-930-002).
16. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
17. Do the process control self-check.
18. Do ACC for the copier application program.
19. Do ACC for the printer application program.
SM 3-79 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
B202/B178/B180 3-80 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R609.WMF
[A]
B178R586.WMF
SM 3-81 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.13.8 PSU
[A]
B178R611.WMF
[A]
B178R612.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-82 SM
DRIVE UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B178R613.WMF
[B]
[A]
B178R614.WMF
SM 3-83 B202/B178/B180
DRIVE UNIT
[A]
B178R615.WMF
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B178R616.WMF
4. Turn the drum gears [B] counterclockwise. Make sure the shoulder screws
[C][D] are in the three, seven, or eleven o'clock positions.
NOTE: You can align the three corners of each drum-gear shaft to the three
openings on the development-clutch securing plate [E].
B202/B178/B180 3-84 SM
DRIVE UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R617.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
[H]
B178R618.WMF [G]
8. 4 gear drive holders [D]∼[G] ( x 1 for each)
9. Development clutch securing plate [H] ( x 8, x 4)
NOTE: Two of the six connectors are on the rear side.
SM 3-85 B202/B178/B180
DRIVE UNIT
[A]
[B]
B178R619.WMF
[A]
B178R620.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-86 SM
DRIVE UNIT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B178R621.WMF
[C]
2 1
[B]
B178R622.WMF
[D]
SM 3-87 B202/B178/B180
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
B178R623.WMF
[B]
B202/B178/B180 3-88 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
and
B178R624.WMF
[E]
[C] [D]
B178R625.WMF
CAUTION: 1) Toner spills out when you remove the toner path cover and toner
supply pipe. Put some paper or cloth under the toner supply unit and
waste toner collection path before you remove them.
2) Use a paper clip or tape to close the pipe after you remove it.
SM 3-89 B202/B178/B180
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[B]
[A]
B178R626.WMF
[C]
B178R627.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-90 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
[B]
Replacement
B178R628.WMF
Adjustment
and
4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.
5. Unwind the harness and connect it.
6. Install the bushing.
7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].
8. Check that the pipes [C] do not come
off the unit.
9. Attach the toner path cover and
secure it with screws.
10. Reassemble the machine.
[C]
B178R629.WMF
SM 3-91 B202/B178/B180
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[B]
[A]
B178R630.WMF
B202/B178/B180 3-92 SM
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A] [B]
and
B178R631.WMF
SM 3-93 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT
SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes Action
Not Developer When initializing only When done in SP mode, do
performed initialization is not the black developer, the the developer initialization
performed. initialization result again. Reinstall the engine
becomes “1000”. main firmware if the result is
the same.
shooting
Trouble-
initialization at unit
replacement) is enabled.
Successfully Developer -
completed initialization is
1
successfully
completed.
Forced Developer A cover was opened or When done in SP mode, do
termination initialization was the main switch was the developer initialization
forcibly terminated. turned off during the again. Reinstall the engine
initialization. main firmware if the result is
2 the same.
SM 4-1 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
NOTE: The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP5-
999-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes
when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on
if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
B202/B178/B180/ 4-2 SM
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
shooting
Trouble-
3 If no problem is observed with image density and/or
development gamma, nothing needs to be done.
If an image problem such as low image density is
observed, check the following points:
Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor
Sampling Not enough data can 1. ID sensor pattern 1. Check the image
4
data error be sampled. density is too high or development process
Gamma Gamma is out of low. and correct toner
error range. 2. Residual image on density if necessary.
5 transfer belt 2. Check the transfer
0.3 > Gamma, or
6.0 < Gamma 3. Toner dropped from belt-cleaning unit.
Vk error Vk is out of range. development unit 3. Clean the development
-150 > Vk or 150 < 4. Scratched or damaged unit and correct toner
6 Vk transfer belt density.
4. Replace the transfer
belt.
Vt error Vt is out of range. 1. Development unit not 1. Check.
0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt correctly installed.
2. Toner density is too low 2. Check and/or correct
7
or high. toner density.
3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace development
unit.
Sampling Not enough data can See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,
data error be sampled during 5, and 6.
during LD the LD power
8
power correction (if “LD
correction Power” is set in SP3-
125-002).
Forced Process control self- A cover was opened or the Do the process control
9 termination check was forcibly main switch was turned off self-check again.
terminated. during the self-check.
SM 4-3 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
B202/B178/B180/ 4-4 SM
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
shooting
Trouble-
magnification error adjustment range (magenta only).
Magenta sub scan The detected sub scan registration is out of the
57
registration error adjustment range (magenta only).
Magenta main The detected main scan registration is out of the
58 scan registration adjustment range (magenta only).
error
Magenta skew The detected skew correction value is out of the
59
correction error adjustment range (magenta only).
Yellow & magenta The detected magnification value is out of the
66
magnification error adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
Yellow & magenta The detected sub scan registration is out of the
67 sub scan adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
registration error
Yellow & magenta The detected main scan registration is out of the
68 main scan adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
registration error
Yellow & magenta The detected skew correction value is out of the
69 skew correction adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
error
Cyan & magenta The detected magnification value is out of the
76
magnification error adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
Cyan & magenta The detected sub scan registration is out of the
77 sub scan adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
registration error
Cyan & magenta The detected main scan registration is out of the
78 main scan adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
registration error
Cyan & magenta The detected skew correction value is out of the
79 skew correction adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
error
SM 4-5 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
Note 1: Error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) stop sampling data at he following time: The
front, center, or, rear ID sensor detect an error. The machine can show the
error codes for all ID sensors in some cases.
B202/B178/B180/ 4-6 SM
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
Possible
Possible Cause Action
Error Code
6 The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;
The machine is in the toner near end 13 Replenish toner.
or end condition.
The machine is not ready to do the 17 Wait until machine goes to the ready
line position adjustment manually from condition from the energy saver or
the user menu. auto off mode.
Line position adjustment cannot be 18 Fix the problem causing the potential
done due to failed potential control. control error.
7 The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)
No error code shows. However, the 1. Fix the bias leak and/or replace
machine continues to show PCU
“execution” on the screen.
In addition, the green LED on the
BICU stays on or off under the
following condition.
1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to
electrical noise generated by a high
voltage leak on a damaged OPC
drum.
8 The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)
No error code shows. However, the 1. Check the connection between
shooting
Trouble-
machine continues to show the detection board and memory
“execution” on the screen. chip.
The green LED on the BICU keeps 2. Replace the toner cartridge.
blinking faintly (this is normal) even
under the following conditions:
1. Poor connection between the toner
cartridge detection board and the
memory chip on the toner cartridge
2. The memory chip on the toner
cartridge fails.
SM 4-7 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER TEST MODE
B202/B178/B180/ 4-8 SM
SCANNER TEST MODE
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-9 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the
main switch on (
SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004)
in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when
the SC code is detected.
NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.
2) If the problem is related to a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before you replace motors or sensors.
B202/B178/B180/ 4-10 SM
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SC Code Classification
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
100 - Scanner
1XX Scanning
190 - Unique for a specific model
200 - Polygon motor
220 - Synchronization control
230 - FGATE signal related
2XX Laser exposure
240 - LD control
260 - Magnification
280 - Unique for a specific model
300 - Charge
330 - Drum potential
3XX Image development 1
350 - Development
380 - Unique for a specific model
400 - Image transfer
420 - Paper separation
430 - Cleaning
4XX Image development 2
440 - Around drum
460 - Unit
480 - Others
500 - Paper feed
shooting
Trouble-
5XX Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex
520 - Paper transport
530 - Fan motor
540 - Fusing
5XX Paper feed / Fusing
560 - Others
570 - Unique for a specific model
600 - Electrical counters
620 - Mechanical counters
630 - Account control
6XX Communication 640 - CSS
650 - Network
670 - Internal data processing
680 - Unique for a specific model
700 - Original handling
7XX Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher
740 - Booklet finisher
800 - Error after ready condition
820 - Diagnostics error
8XX Controller
860 - Hard disk
880 - Unique for a specific model
900 - Counter
9XX Others 920 - Memory
990 - Others
SM 4-11 B202/B178/B180
SC TABLE
4.4 SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 101 Exposure lamp • The standard white level is • Exposure lamp 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error not correctly detected when defective 2. Turn the power key off and on.
scanning the shading plate. • Lamp stabilizer 3. Check and clean the scanner
(The shading data peak defective mirror(s) and scanner lens.
does not reach the specified • Exposure lamp 4. Check and clean the shading plate.
threshold) connector defective 5. Replace the exposure lamp.
• Standard white plate 6. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
dirty 7. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens.
scanner lens out of 8. Replace the SBU.
position or dirty
• SBU defective
SC 120 Scanner home • The scanner home position • Scanner I/O board or SC 121 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
position error 1 sensor does not detect the SBU defective and 122 2. Check the cable connection between
“on” condition during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
scanning. defective motor.
• Harness between 3. Check the cable connection between
scanner I/O board the SBU and HP sensor.
and scanner motor 4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
disconnected board.
• Scanner HP sensor 5. Replace the scanner motor.
defective 6. Replace the HP sensor.
• Harness between 7. Replace the following:
SBU and HP sensor • Scanner wire
disconnected • Timing belt
• Scanner wire, timing • Pulley
belt, pulley, or • Carriage
carriage defective
B202/B178/B180 4-12 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 121 Scanner home • The scanner home position • Scanner I/O board or SC 120 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
position error 2 sensor does not detect the SBU defective and 122 2. Check the cable connection between
“off” condition during • Scanner motor the scanner I/O board and scanner
scanning. defective motor.
• Harness between 3. Check the cable connection between
scanner I/O board the SBU and HP sensor.
and scanner motor 4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
disconnected board.
• Scanner HP sensor 5. Replace the scanner motor.
defective 6. Replace the HP sensor.
• Harness between 7. Replace the following:
SBU and HP sensor • Scanner wire
disconnected • Timing belt
• Scanner wire, timing • Pulley
belt, pulley, or • Carriage
carriage defective
SC Black level • The black level cannot be • Defective SBU 1. Replace the SBU. D
141- detection error adjusted within the target
001 value during the zero clamp
after the home position
detection.
SC Black level • The black level cannot be • Defective SBU 1. Replace the SBU. D
141- detection error adjusted within the target
002 value during the zero clamp
after the AGC.
SC 142 White level • The white level cannot be • Dirty exposure glass 1. Turn on the main switch off and on. D
detection error adjusted within the target or optics section 2. Clean the exposure glass, white plate,
during auto gain control. • SBU board defective mirrors, and lens.
• IPU board defective 3. Check if the exposure lamp is lit
• Exposure lamp during initialization.
defective 4. Check the harness connection
• Lamp stabilizer between SBU and IPU.
defective 5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
7. Replace the IPU board
SM 4-13 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 144 SBU • The SBU hardware is • Defective SBU 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication inconsistent with the hardware 2. Replace the SBU.
error software. • Incorrect software 3. Update the software.
SC 161 IPU error • After the command is • IPU board defective 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
written into the DFID self- (defective connection 2. Replace the IPU board.
diagnosis startup register, between ASIC and
the correct value is not DFID, or Defective
stored in the register in the LSYNC)
specified duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected when the main
switch is turned on.
• After the negate interruption
of FGATE occurs, IPU is not
recognized in the specified
duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected during scanning
operations.
SC 195 Serial Number • Serial number stored in the • NVRAM defective Open the front cover and turn on the D
Mismatch memory does not have the • BCU replaced without main switch. Check the serial number
correct code. original NVRAM with SP5-811-002.
• Incorrect DIP-switch If the stored serial number is incorrect,
setting contact your supervisor.
For DIP-switch settings, see section
5.10.
B202/B178/B180 4-14 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 201 Polygon motor • The polygon mirror motor • Polygon mirror motor SC 221- 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error does not reach the targeted error 1 to 4 2. Check the cables.
operating speed within 10 • Abnormal GAVD 3. Replace the polygon motor.
seconds after turning on. behavior
• The lock signal does not • Cable disconnection
become high within 3
seconds after turning off the
polygon motor.
• The lock signal does not
become low within 0.2
second after the polygon
motor reaches the targeted
operating speed.
SC 220 Synch. The front (for K&Y) or rear (for • Disconnection of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
detection signal C&M) laser synchronizing cable between front 2. Check the cable connection between
error 1 detector board, (used to (K&Y) or rear (C&M) front (for K&Y) or rear (for C&M)
220-001: Y determine the start timing of synchronizing synchronizing detector board and the
220-002: M laser writing), does not send a detector board and LD unit.
220-003: C signal while the polygon motor the LD unit 3. Check or reinstall the front (for K&Y)
220-004: K0 operates normally and the LD • Incorrect installation or rear (for C&M) synchronizing
220-005: K1 is on. of front (K&Y) or rear detector board.
(C&M) synchronizing 4. Replace the front (for K&Y) or rear
detector board (the (for C&M) synchronizing detector
beam does not target board.
the photo detector.) 5. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
• Defective LD unit 6. Replace the BCU.
• Defective BCU 7. Replace the PSU.
• Defective +5VLD
circuit
SM 4-15 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 221 Synch. Main scan length detection is • Damaged or After doing one of the following, print ten D
detection signal not correctly completed ten disconnected cable jobs or more to see if the same SC code
error 2 consecutive times. between front (C&M) shows:
221-001: Y or rear (K&Y) laser 1. Turn the main switch off and on.
221-002: M The front (for C&M) or rear (for synchronizing 2. Check or replace the cable-
221-003: C K&Y) laser synchronizing detector board and connecting front (for C&M) or rear (for
221-004: K detector boards are used for the LD unit K&Y) synchronizing detector board
the main scan length • Incorrect installation and the LD unit.
detection, which automatically of front (C&M) or rear 3. Check or reinstall the front (for C&M)
corrects the main-scan (K&Y) synchronizing or rear (for K&Y) synchronizing
magnification. detector board (the detector board.
beam does not target 4. Replace the front (for C&M) or rear
the photo detector.) (for K&Y) synchronizing detector
• Defective front (C&M) board.
or rear (K&Y) 5. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
synchronizing 6. Replace the BCU.
detector board Do the following as a temporary
• Defective LD unit measure if you cannot replace the
synch. detector board:
• Disable main scan length detection
(SP 2-919-001)
B202/B178/B180 4-16 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 230 FGATE error The BCU generates the • Poor connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
230-001: Y FGATE signal based on the between BCU and LD 2. Check the cables between the LD
230-002: M registration sensor ON timing. units units and the BCU.
230-003: C Then it sends the signal to the • Defective BCU 3. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
230-004: K LD units. The LD units send a • Defective LD unit 4. Replace the BCU.
feedback signal to the BCU.
When the LD units start
emitting laser beams, the
feedback signal changes from
High to Low.
SM 4-17 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 240 LD over The power supply for the LD • LD worn out 1. Replace the laser optics-housing unit. C
240-001: Y unit exceeds 110 mA. (current/light output
240-002: M characteristics have
240-003: C changed.)
240-004: K • LD broken (short
circuit)
SC 260 LD HP sensor During homing, it takes more • Defective motor 1. Check the sensor actuator position of C
not switched on than five seconds to switch the • Defective sensor the LD positioning motor.
(for K only) HP sensor on (the sensor • Mechanical problem 2. Replace the LD positioning motor.
actuator does not cover the when switching the 3. Replace the LD home position
sensor). actuator sensor.
• Brown fuse (FU81) on 4. Check and/or replace the PSU.
the Power supply unit
SC 261 LD HP sensor After the laser beam pitch is • Defective motor 1. Check the sensor actuator position of C
not switched off changed, it takes more than • Defective sensor the LD positioning motor.
(for K only) five seconds for the HP sensor • Mechanical problem 2. Replace the LD positioning motor.
to switch off. when switching the 3. Replace the LD home position
actuator sensor.
• Brown fuse (FU81) on 4. Check and/or replace the PSU.
the Power supply unit
B202/B178/B180 4-18 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 285 Line position Line position adjustment fails • Pattern sampling 1. Check and fix the problem that C
adjustment four consecutive times. error due to causes low image density. .
(MUSIC) error insufficient image 2. Clean or replace the transfer belt
density of patterns and/or the ID sensor.
used for the 3. Replace the PCU or clean the
adjustment development unit that causes toner to
• Inconsistency in the drop on the transfer belt.
sampling line position
adjustment pattern
due to dust on the
pattern, damage to
the OPC drum,
damage or toner
dropped on the
transfer belt, or a dirty
or defective ID sensor
SC 370 TD sensor [K]: During the developer • Poor connection (TD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
Adjustment initialization, the output value sensor outputs is less 2. Reset the related color development
error of the TD sensor is out of the than 0.5V.) unit.
SC 371 TD sensor [Y]: adjustment range (X ± 0.2V). • Defective TD sensor 3. Replace the related color
Adjustment NOTE: “X” is adjusted with development unit.
error SP3-006-005.
SC 372 TD sensor [C]:
Adjustment
error
SC 373 TD sensor [M] :
Adjustment
error
SC 374 Vt error [K] During the image • Poor connection (TD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
SC 375 Vt error [Y] development, Vt value is less sensor outputs is less 2. Reset the related color development
SC 376 Vt error [C] than 0.78V. than 0.5V.) unit.
SC 377 Vt error [M] • Defective TD sensor 3. Replace the related color
development unit.
SM 4-19 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 380 Black When the motor speed is • Defective motor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
development within the target level, the • Defective BCU 2. Replace the motor.
motor error motor sends a lock signal 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 381 Color (High to Low at CN214-5) to
development the BCU.
motor error SC380 is detected under the
following conditions:
• The Lock signal stays High
2 seconds after the motor
turns on.
• The Lock signal stays Low 2
seconds after the motor
turns off.
• The Lock signal stays High
for more than 2 seconds
while the motor is on.
SC 385 ID sensor VSG Vsg is the out of adjustment • Defective ID sensor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
adjustment range during a process control • Dirty ID sensor 2. Clean the ID sensor and adjacent
error self-check. • ID sensor parts.
disconnected 3. Check the drum cleaning condition.
Adjustment range: • Dirty drum (cleaning 4. Check the ID sensor connector.
4.0 ± 0.5V incomplete) 5. Replace the ID sensor.
SC 386 Development If the following conditions • Unsuitable toner 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
gamma error K happen three consecutive density 2. Check the process control self-check
SC 387 Development times: • Toner supply result (SP3-975). If the result is not
gamma error Y • When the development mechanism problem “1”, fix the problem according to the
SC 388 Development gamma is out of the • Laser exposure table in section 4.1.2.
gamma error C following range: problem 3. Print a full color image by disabling
SC 389 Development 0.3 ≤ γ ≥ 6.0 • Image transfer SC detection (SP5-809-001) and
gamma error M • When Vk is out of the problem check if the image quality is OK. If the
following range: image quality is not OK, fix the
-150V ≤ Vk ≥ 150V problem. Then enable the SC
• Development gamma detection again.
calculation error
B202/B178/B180 4-20 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 390 Development The high voltage supply board • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
Bias output (C/B) checks the circuit and • Defective power pack 2. Check if the harness and cables are
error detects abnormal conditions C/B output correctly connected.
such as a voltage leak or no • Damaged cable 3. Disconnect the high voltage supply
output condition. If this • Defective cables from the bias terminals on the
happens, the high voltage development unit high voltage supply board C/B.
supply board sends an error • Defective BCU Measure the DC voltage with a multi-
signal (High to Low at CN204- meter.
A18) to the BCU. • Replace the high voltage supply
board if no voltage is supplied.
The BCU checks this signal 4. If the result is OK at step 2, check if
every 2 ms and generates this the high voltage supply cable or
SC code when the error development unit is grounded.
condition occurs 250 • Replace the high voltage supply
consecutive times. cable if it is damaged.
• Replace the development unit if it
is damaged.
5. Check if the PWM signals are sent to
the high voltage supplied board from
the BCU. Replace the BCU or
harness between the BCU and high
voltage supply board if the voltage is
0.
SC 391 Charge AC: The high voltage supply board • Power pack 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
output error sends the feedback signal disconnected 2. Check the connector.
391-01: K (CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). The • Charge receptacle or 3. Check that the PCU is correctly
391-02: Y BCU checks these feedback terminal installed.
391-03: M signals every 8 ms. If the • Defective PCU bias 4. Check the PCU charge voltage input
391-04: C average of the sampled data is input terminal (the spring/conducting shaft) or
not within the control target 20 • Incorrect power pack replace the PCU.
consecutive times, this SC B/C output 5. Replace the power pack B/C.
code is generated. • Damaged cable 6. Replace the cable.
• Defective BCU 7. Replace the BCU.
• PCU not found
SM 4-21 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 392 Air pump motor Three consecutive errors are • Damaged cable 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error detected in motor-driver-signal • Short circuit 2. Replace the air pump.
392-001: MY samples. The samples are • Defective motor 3. Check the circuit.
392-002: CK collected every 0.01 second.
SC 393 TD sensor error The development-unit drive • Loose cable 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
during warming starts. TD sensor signal is 0.78 connection 2. Check that the development unit is
up V or less. • Positioning plate out correctly installed.
393-001: K of place 3. Remove the development unit and
393-002: Y • Defective TD sensor check the connector on the rear.
393-003: C • Development unit not 4. Check the positioning plate.
393-004: M found 5. Replace the development unit.
SC 440 Drum motor No drum gear position sensor • Defective PCU 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
error signal is detected within 0.8 • Defective drum motor 2. Check and/or replace the PCU.
440-001: Black second (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, • Defective drum gear 3. Check and/or replace the sensor.
440-002: Color C2b: 162 mm/s) or 2.0 position sensor
seconds (81 mm/s).
SC Thermistor 1 When the temperature • Thermistor 1 1. Check the cable connections. C
460- error (open detected by thermistor 1, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
001 circuit) which is at the left (fusing unit) • Cable connection 3. Replace the BCU.
side of the laser optics unit, is error
less than -30°C for 10 seconds • BCU defect
consecutively, the BCU
determines that the circuit is
open and shows this SC code.
SC Thermistor 1 When the temperature • Thermistor 1 1. Check the cable connections. C
460- error (short detected by the thermistor 1, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
002 circuit) which is at the left (fusing unit) • Cable connection 3. Replace the BCU.
side of the laser optics unit, is error
higher than 70°C for 10 • BCU defect
seconds consecutively, the
BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and shows
this SC code
B202/B178/B180 4-22 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Thermistor 2 When the temperature • Thermistor 2 1. Check the cable connections. C
461- error (open detected by the thermistor 2, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
001 circuit) which is at the right (paper • Cable connection 4. Replace the BCU.
feed section) side of the laser error
optics unit, is less than -30°C • BCU defect
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is open and shows this
SC code.
SC Thermistor 2 When the temperature • Thermistor 2 1. Check the cable connections. C
461- error (short detected by the thermistor 2, defective 2. Replace the thermistor.
002 circuit) which is at the right (paper • Cable connection 3. Replace the BCU.
feed section) side of the laser error
optics unit, is higher than 70°C • BCU defect
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and shows
this SC code
SC 471 Transfer belt The transfer belt HP sensor • Transfer belt unit not 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
H.P. error signal does not change from set correctly 2. Reset the transfer belt unit.
Low to High (home position) or • Defective transfer belt 3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
vice-versa 1 second after the H.P. sensor and/or sensor.
transfer belt contact motor transfer belt sensor 4. Replace the transfer belt contact
turns on. • Defective transfer belt motor.
contact motor 5. Check the contact and release
• Transfer belt unit mechanism of the transfer belt unit.
problem
SC 481 Waste toner The waste toner vibrator does • Loose connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
vibrator error not operate. • Defective motor 2. Replace the motor.
SM 4-23 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 490 Transfer bias / The high voltage supply board • Defective high 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
paper attraction transfer checks the circuit and voltage supply board 2. Check the transfer unit and replace
roller bias leak detects current leaks. If this - Transfer the belt and/or the transfer unit if it is
error happens, the high voltage • Damaged transfer damaged.
supply board sends a SC belt 3. Replace the high voltage supply
signal (High to Low at CN213- board - Transfer.
8) to the BCU.
• Transfer unit 4. Check and/or replace the high voltage
• Damaged high supply cables.
The BCU checks this signal voltage supply cables 5. Check and/or replace the dc cables
every 2 ms and generates this • Damaged cables between the BCU and high voltage
SC code when the error between the BCU and supply board.
condition occurs 250 high voltage supply 6. Replace the BCU.
consecutive times. board
• Defective BCU
SC 501 Paper Tray 1 When the tray lift motor is • Defective paper lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
error turned on, (if the upper limit is sensor 2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly
SC 502 Paper Tray 2 not detected within 10 • Defective tray lift moves up and down manually.
error seconds), the machine asks motor 3. Check and/or replace the paper lift
the user to reset the tray. If this • Defective bottom sensor.
condition occurs three plate lift mechanism 4. Check and/or replace the tray lift
consecutive times, the SC is motor.
generated.
B202/B178/B180 4-24 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Tray 3 error For the paper feed unit: For the paper feed unit: 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
503-01 (Paper Feed When the tray lift motor is • Defective tray lift 2. Check the cable connections.
Unit or LCT) turned on, (if the upper limit is motor or connector 3. Check and/or replace the defective
not detected within 18 disconnection component.
seconds), the machine asks • Defective lift sensor
the user to reset the tray. If this or connector
condition occurs three disconnection
consecutive times, the SC is
generated. For the LCT:
• Defective stack
For the LCT: transport clutch or
This SC is generated under connector
the following conditions: disconnection
• If the upper or lower limit is • Defective tray motor
not detected within 15 or connector
seconds when the tray lift disconnection
motor is turned on to lift up • Defective end fence
or lower the tray home position sensor
• If the paper stack is not or connector
transported within a specific disconnection
number of pulses after the • Defective upper limit
tray motor and stack sensor or connector
transport clutch turn on to disconnection
transport the paper stack • Defective tray lift
• If the end fence home motor or connector
position sensor stays ON for disconnection
a specific number of pulses
after the tray motor and
stack transport clutch turn
on to transport the paper
stack.
SM 4-25 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Tray 3 error • This SC is generated if the For the paper feed unit: 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
503-02 (Paper Feed following condition occurs 3 • Defective tray lift 2. Check the cable connections.
Unit or LCT) consecutive times. motor or connector 3. Check and/or replace the defective
disconnection component.
For the paper feed unit: • Defective lift sensor
When the main switch is or connector
turned or when the tray is set disconnection
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on For the LCT:
to lower the bottom plate until • Defective stack
the lift sensor goes off. transport clutch or
If the motor turns on for 7 connector
seconds or more, the machine disconnection
asks the user to reset the tray. • Defective tray motor
or connector
For the LCT: disconnection
When the main switch is • Defective end fence
turned on or when the LCT is home position sensor
set, if the end fence is not in or connector
the home position (home disconnection
position sensor ON), the tray
lift motor stops.
SC Tray 4 error (3 When the tray lift motor is • Defective tray lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
504-01 Tray Paper turned on, (if the upper limit is motor or connector 2. Check the cable connections.
Feed Unit) not detected within 18 disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective
seconds), the machine asks • Defective lift sensor component.
the user to reset the tray. If this or connector
condition occurs three disconnection
consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
B202/B178/B180 4-26 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC Tray 4 error (3 When the main switch is • Defective tray lift 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
504-02 Tray Paper turned or when the tray is set motor or connector 2. Check the cable connections.
Feed Unit) and if the upper limit is already disconnection 3. Check and/or replace the defective
detected, the lift motor turns on • Defective lift sensor component.
to lower the bottom plate until or connector
the lift sensor goes off. disconnection
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
If this condition occurs 3
consecutive times, this SC is
generated.
SC 530 Fusing fan The BCU does not receive the • Defective fusing fan 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
motor error lock signal (CN210-B5) 5 motor or connector 2. Check the connector and/or replace
seconds after turning on the disconnection the fusing fan motor.
fusing fan. • Defective BCU 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 541 Heating roller The temperature measured by • Loose connection of 1. Check if the heating roller thermistor A
thermistor error the heating roller thermistor the heating roller is firmly connected.
does not reach 7 °C for ten thermistor 2. Replace the fusing unit.
seconds. • Defective heating 3. Replace the BCU.
roller thermistor
• Defective BCU
SM 4-27 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 542 Heating roller When the fusing unit is not • Heating roller fusing SC 552 1. Check if the heating roller thermistor A
warm-up error running after the main switch lamp broken is firmly connected.
has been turned on or • Defective heating 2. Replace the fusing unit.
recovering, the increment of roller thermistor 3. Replace the BCU.
the heating roller temperature • Defective BCU
per three seconds is 17°C or
less. If this condition is
detected five times
consecutively, SC 542 is
defined.
The heating roller temperature
does not reach the ready
temperature while 150
seconds after the heating lamp
has been turned on.
SC 543 Heating roller The detected fusing • Defective PSU SC 553 1. Replace the PSU. A
fusing lamp temperature stays at 250°C or • Defective BCU 2. Replace the BCU.
overheat more for 2 seconds.
SC 544 Heating roller During stand-by mode or a • Defective heating SC 543 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp print job, the detected heating roller thermistor 2. Replace the PSU.
high roller temperature stays at • Defective PSU 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature 230 °C or more for 0.2 second. • Defective BCU
error
SC 545 Heating roller When the fusing unit is not • Heating roller SC 555 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp running in the Ready condition, thermistor out of
consecutive full the heating roller fusing lamp position
power keeps on with full power for 35
consecutive seconds.
SC 551 Pressure roller The measured pressure roller • Loose connection of SC 541 1. Check that the pressure roller A
thermistor error temperature does not reach pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected.
7°C for 60 seconds. thermistor 2. Replace the fusing unit.
• Defective pressure 3. Replace the BCU.
roller thermistor
• Defective BCU
B202/B178/B180 4-28 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 552 Pressure roller After the main switch is turned • Pressure roller fusing SC 542 1. Check if the pressure roller thermistor A
warm-up error on or the door is closed, the lamp broken is firmly connected.
pressure roller temperature • Defective pressure 2. Replace the fusing unit.
does not reach the ready roller thermistor 3. Replace the BCU.
temperature within 210 • Defective BCU
seconds during fusing unit
warm-up.
SC 553 Pressure roller The detected pressure roller • Defective PSU SC 543 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp temperature stays at 210°C or • Defective BCU 2. Replace the PSU.
overheat more for five seconds. 3. Replace the BCU.
SC 555 Pressure roller When the fusing unit is not • Pressure roller SC 545 1. Replace the fusing unit. A
fusing lamp running in the Ready condition, thermistor out of
consecutive full the pressure roller-fusing lamp position
power keeps ON with full power for
300 consecutive seconds.
SC 560 Zero cross error When the main switch is • Electrical noise in the 1. Replace the PSU. A
turned on, the machine checks supply from the
how many zero-cross signals power cord
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
SC 620 ARDF • After the ARDF is detected, • Incorrect installation 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication the break signal occurs or of ARDF 2. Check the cable connection of the
error communication timeout • ARDF defective ARDF.
occurs. • IPU board defective 3. Shut out the external noise.
• External noise 4. Replace the ARDF.
5. Replace the IPU board.
SM 4-29 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 621 Two-tray While the BCU communicates • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
finisher/booklet with an optional unit, an SC • BCU problems 2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
finisher code is displayed if one of • PSU problems in the correctly connected.
communication following conditions occurs. machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
error 1. The BCU receives the • Main board problems supplied to peripherals.
SC 622 Bank break signal which is in the peripherals 4. Replace the BCU or main board of
communication generated by the peripherals.
error peripherals only just after
SC 623 Duplex unit the main switch is turned • Cable problems 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication on. • BCU problems 2. Check if the cable of the duplex
error 2. When the BCU does not • PSU problems in the inverter unit is correctly connected.
receive an OK signal from a machine 3. Replace the PSU if no power is
peripheral 100ms after • Duplex control board supplied to the peripherals.
sending a command to it. problem 4. Replace the duplex control board in
The BCU resends the the inverter unit.
command. The BCU does
not receive an OK signal
after sending the command
3 times.
SC 630 CSS An communication error has • Communication line Logging only. CTL
communication occurred during error
error communication with the CSS.
SC 632 MF accounting The controller sends data to • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
device error 1 the accounting device, but the between the 2. Check the connection.
device does not respond. This controller and the
occurs three times. accounting device
SC 633 MF accounting After communication is
device error 2 established, the controller
receives the brake signal from
the accounting device.
B202/B178/B180 4-30 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 634 MF accounting The accounting device sends • Defective controller of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
device error 3 the controller the report that the MF accounting 2. Replace the controller board of the
indicates a backup RAM error device accounting device.
has occurred. • Battery error 3. Replace the battery.
SC 635 MF accounting The accounting device sends
device error 4 the controller the report that
indicates the battery voltage
error has occurred.
SC 670 No response When the main power is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
from BCU at turned on or the machine • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
power on starts warming up from • Defective BCU BCU and controller.
energy-saving mode, the 3. Replace the controller.
controller does not receive a 4. Replace the BCU.
command signal from the
BCU.
SC 672 Controller-to- • After the machine is • Controller stalled 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
operation panel powered on, the • Controller board 2. Check the condition of the controller
communication communication between the installed incorrectly board.
error at startup controller and the operation • Controller board 3. Check the condition of the operation
panel is not established, or defective panel.
communication with • Operation panel 4. Replace the controller board.
controller is interrupted after connector loose or 5. Replace the operation panel.
a normal startup. defective 6. Turn the main switch off, wait for one
• After startup reset of the • The controller is not second or more, and turn the main
operation panel, the completely shutdown switch on.
attention code or the when you turn the
attention acknowledge code main switch off.
is not sent from the
controller within 15 seconds.
• After the controller issues a
command to check the
communication line with the
controller at 30-second
intervals, the controller fails
to respond twice.
SM 4-31 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 680 BCU/ MUSIC After the engine CPU sends a • Toner cartridge 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication message, the Music CPU does memory chip loose 2. Check if the toner cartridge is
error not respond within five connection installed correctly.
seconds three consecutive • Memory chip problem 3. Replace the toner cartridge.
times. • Memory chip cable 4. Check if the harnesses are not
wiring problem damaged.
5. Replace the BCU.
SC 685 SBU-IPU • During data transfer, a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication checksum error occurs. between SBU and 2. Shut out the external noise.
error • During any operation except IPU 3. Check the cable connection of the
initialization, the SBU sends • SBU board defective scanner unit.
a hardware-reset • IPU board defective 4. Replace the SBU board.
acknowledgement to the • External noise 5. Replace the IPU board.
IPU.
SC 686 BCU-IPU • After the machine is • Board connector 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication powered on or recovering between BCU and 2. Check the cable connection between
error from the power save mode, controller loose the board connector and BCU.
timeout occurs during BCU • Board connector 3. Check the cable connection between
communication. between controller controller and motherboard.
• The break signal is received and motherboard 4. Check the cable connection between
after the communication is loose motherboard and IPU.
normally established with • Board connector 5. Replace the BCU board.
the BCU. between motherboard 6. Replace the IPU board.
• Timeout occurs while the and IPU loose 7. Replace the controller board.
communication with the • BCU board defective 8. Replace the motherboard.
BCU is retried after a • IPU board defective
communication error. • Controller board
defective
• Motherboard
defective
SC 687 Memory The BCU does not receive a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
address memory address command • Defective controller 2. Check if the controller is firmly
command error from the controller 120 • Defective BCU connected to the BCU.
seconds after paper is in the 3. Replace the controller.
position for registration. 4. Replace the BCU.
B202/B178/B180 4-32 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC GAVD • The I2C bus device ID is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
690- communication identified during • Defective BCU 2. Check the cable connection.
001 error initialization. • Defective LD 3. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
690-001: Y • A device-status error occurs controller board 4. Replace the BCU board.
690-002: M during I2C bus
690-003: C communication.
690-004: K • The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
SC 692 GAPCI2C • The I2C bus device ID is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. D
communication identified during • Defective BCU 2. Check the cable connection.
error initialization. • Defective LD 3. Replace the BCU.
• A device-status error occurs controller board
during I2C bus
communication.
• The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
SC 700 ARDF original • After the pick-up motor is • Original stopper HP SC 701 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
pick-up turned on, the original sensor defective 2. Replace the HP sensor.
malfunction stopper HP sensor is not • Pick-up motor 3. Turn the main switch off and on.
activated. defective (not 4. Replace the pick-up motor.
rotating) 5. Replace the control board.
• Timing belt out of
position
• ARDF main board
defective
SC 701 ARDF original • The original pick-up HP • Original pick-up HP SC 700 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
pick-up/paper sensor is not activated after sensor defective 2. Replace the pick-up motor.
lift mechanism the pick-up motor is turned • Pick-up motor 3. Replace the control board.
malfunction on. defective 4. Replace the HP sensor.
• ARDF main board
defective
SM 4-33 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 722 Two-tray • The jogger fences of the • Defective jogger H.P. 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher jogger two-tray finisher donot sensor 2. Check the connection of jogger H.P.
motor error return to home position • Loose connection sensor and jogger motor connectors
within a specific time. • Defective jogger 3. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor.
• The two-tray finisher jogger motor 4. Replace the jogger motor.
motor does not leave home
position within a given time.
SC 724 Two-tray Stapling does not finish within • Staple jam 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher staple 150 ms after the staple • Loose connection 2. Check if the staple hammer motor
hammer motor hammer motor turns on. • Overload caused by connector is correctly connected.
error stapling too many 3. Check if the staple jam occurs.
pages 4. Replace the staple hammer motor.
• Defective staple
hammer motor
SC 725 Two-tray The stack feed-out belt H.P. • Defective stack feed- 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stack sensor does not activate within out H.P. sensor 2. Check if the connectors of the stack
feed-out motor a specified time after the stack • Loose connection feed-out H.P. sensor and motor are
error feed-out motor turns on. • Stack feed-out motor correctly connected.
overload 3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P.
• Defective stack feed- sensor.
out motor 4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.
B202/B178/B180 4-34 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 726 Two-tray • The upper stack height 1 • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher shift sensor is activated • Defective upper stack 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
tray 1 lift motor consecutively (detecting height 1 sensor and motor are correctly connected.
error paper) for 15 seconds after • Defective shift tray 1 3. Replace the upper stack height 1
the shift tray starts moving lift motor sensor.
up. • Motor overload 4. Replace the shift tray 1 lift motor.
• The upper stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
down.
• When the upper tray moves
from lower paper exit to the
upper paper exit, the upper
stack height 1 sensor is
activated.
SC 727 Two-tray The stapler cannot return to its • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stapler home position within a • Defective stapler 2. Check if the stapler rotation motor
rotation motor specified time after the stapler rotation motor connector is correctly connected.
error rotation motor starts rotating. • Motor overload 3. Replace the stapler rotation motor.
SC 729 Two-tray The punch home position is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher punch not detected within 250 ms • Defective punch H.P. 2. Check if the connectors of sensor,
motor error after the punch clutch turns on. sensor clutch and/or motor are correctly
• Defective punch connected.
clutch 3. Replace the punch H.P. sensor.
• Defective punch hole 4. Replace the punch clutch.
motor 5. Replace the punch hole motor.
SC 730 Two-tray The stapler home position is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher stapler not detected within a specified • Defective stapler H.P. 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
motor error time after the staple motor sensor and motor are correctly connected.
turns on. • Defective stapler 3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor.
motor 4. Replace the stapler motor.
SM 4-35 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 731 Two-tray The exit guide plate open • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher exit sensor is not activated within a • Defective exit guide 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
guide plate specified time after the exit plate open sensor and motor are correctly connected.
motor error guide plate motor turns on. • Defective exit guide 3. Replace the exit guide plate open
plate motor sensor.
4. Replace the exit guide plate motor.
SC 732 Two-tray Tray 1 home position is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 1 detected within a specified • Defective tray shift 1 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
shift motor error time after the tray 1 shift motor sensor and motor are correctly connected.
turns on. • Defective tray 1 shift 3. Replace the tray shift 1 sensor.
motor 4. Replace the tray 1 shift motor.
SC 733 Two-tray • The lower stack height 1 • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 2 sensor is activated • Defective lower stack 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
lift motor error consecutively (detecting height 1 sensor and motor are correctly connected.
paper) for 15 seconds after • Defective tray 2 lift 3. Replace the lower stack height 1
the shift tray starts moving motor sensor.
up. • Motor overload 4. Replace the tray 2 lift motor.
• The lower stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
down.
SC 734 Two-tray Tray 2 home position is not • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
finisher tray 2 detected within a specified • Defective tray shift 2 2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
shift motor error time after the tray 2 shift motor sensor and motor are correctly connected.
turns on. • Defective tray 2 shift 3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor.
motor 4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor.
B202/B178/B180 4-36 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 740 Booklet finisher • The folder home position • Defective transport 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
transport motor sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check the connection of the transport
error within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of motor.
folder rollers start to move. the transport motor 3. Check the connection of the folder
• The folder home position • Defective folder home home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on position sensor 4. Replace the transport motor.
within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of
folder rollers start the holder home
transporting the paper to the position sensor
booklet tray.
SC 741 Booklet finisher • The paddle home position • Defective paddle 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
paddle motor sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check that the connection of the
error within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of paddle motor.
paddles start to move. the paddle motor 3. Check the connection of the paddle
• The paddle home position • Defective paddle home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on home position sensor 4. Check the connection of the stack-
within 2 seconds after the • Loose connection of tray upper-roller home-position
paddles start to operate. the paddle home sensor.
• The stack-tray upper roller position sensor 5. Replace the paddle motor.
home position sensor does • Defective stack-tray
not turn off within 2 seconds upper-roller home-
after the paddle motor starts position sensor
to lower the roller. • Loose connection of
• The stack-tray upper-roller the stack-tray upper-
home-position sensor does roller home-position
not turn on with in 2 sensor
seconds after the paddle
motor starts to lower the
roller.
SM 4-37 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 742 Booklet finisher • The stapler home position • Defective stapler slide 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stapler slide sensor does not turn off motor 2. Check the connection of the stapler
motor error within 1 second after this • Loose connection of slide motor.
same sensor turns on. the stapler slide 3. Check the connection of the stapler
• The stapler home position motor home position sensor.
sensor does not turn on • Defective stapler 4. Replace the stapler home position
within 1 second when the home position sensor sensor.
stapler is coming back to its • Loose connection of 5. Replace the stapler slide motor.
home position. the stapler home
position sensor
SC 743 Booklet finisher • The front-jogger-fence • Incorrect assembling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
front jogger home-position sensor does of the front jogger 2. Check the connection of the front
fence motor not turn off within 3 seconds fence jogger fence motor.
error after the front-jogger-fence • Loose connection of 3. Check the connection of the front-
motor starts. the front jogger fence jogger-fence home-position sensor.
• The front-jogger-fence motor 4. Replace the front-jogger-fence home-
home-position sensor does • Defective front- position sensor.
not turn on within 3 seconds jogger-fence home- 5. Replace the front jogger fence motor.
when the front-jogger-fence position sensor
motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of
its home position. the front-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
SC 744 Booklet finisher • The rear-jogger-fence • Incorrect assembling 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
rear jogger home-position sensor does of the rear jogger 2. Check the connection of the rear
fence motor not turn off within 3 seconds fence jogger fence motor.
error after the rear-jogger-fence • Loose connection of 3. Check the connection of the rear-
motor starts. the rear jogger fence jogger-fence home-position sensor.
• The rear-jogger-fence motor 4. Replace the rear-jogger-fence home-
home-position sensor does • Defective rear-jogger- position sensor.
not turn on within 3 seconds fence home-position 5. Replace the rear jogger fence motor.
when the rear-jogger-fence sensor
motor is driving the fence to • Loose connection of
its home position. the rear-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
B202/B178/B180 4-38 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 745 Booklet finisher • The stack-tray-belt home- • Defective stack-tray 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stack-tray exit position sensor does not exit motor 2. Check the connection of the stack-
motor error turn off within 394 • Loose connection of tray exit motor.
milliseconds after the stack- the stack-tray exit 3. Check the connection of the stack-
tray exit roller starts to drive motor tray-belt home-position sensor.
the belts. → The stack-tray • Defective stack-tray- 4. Replace the stack-tray-belt home-
exit motor retries to drive belt home-position position sensor.
the belts, but the stack-tray- sensor 5. Replace the stack-tray exit motor.
belt home-position sensor • Loose connection of
still does not turn off within the stack-tray-belt
another 394 milliseconds. home-position sensor
• The stack-tray-belt home-
position sensor does not
turn on within 1,084
milliseconds after the same
home-position sensor turns
off. → The stack-tray exit
motor retires to drive the
belts, but the stack-tray belt
home-position sensor still
does not turn on within
another 1,084 milliseconds.
SM 4-39 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 746 Booklet finisher • The stapler/folder motor • Malfunction of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
stapler/folder starts. However, the stapler/folder motor 2. Check the connection of the
motor error controller does not receive • Loose connection of stapler/folder motor.
the signal from the encoder the stapler/folder 3. Check the connection of the encoder
sensor within 0.1 second. motor sensor.
• The stapler/folder motor • Loose connection of 4. Check the connection of the stapler
starts to drive the stapler the encoder sensor switch.
unit, and the stapler switch • Defective encoder 5. Check the connection of the stapler
is on. However, the sensor home position sensor.
controller does not receive • Loose connection of 6. Check the connection of the folder-
the signal from the home the stapler switch roller home-position sensor.
position sensor for 0.5 • Defective stapler 7. Replace the stapler/folder motor.
second. switch 8. Replace the encoder sensor.
• The stapler starts to staple • Loose connection of 9. Replace the stapler switch.
the paper. However, the the stapler home 10.Replace the stapler home position
controller does not receive position sensor sensor.
any signal from the home 11. Replace the folder-roller home-
• Defective stapler
position sensor, and the position sensor.
home position sensor
stapler switch is off. • Loose connection of
• The stapler/folder motor the folder-roller
starts to drive the folder home-position sensor
rollers. However, the home • Defective folder-roller
position sensor does not home-position sensor
turn off within 9.247
seconds.
• The home position sensor
does not turn on within
9.247 seconds after this
same sensor turns off.
B202/B178/B180 4-40 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 747 Booklet finisher • The upper limit sensor • Defective paper 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
lift motor error detects the regular tray height sensor 2. Check the connection of the paper
while the lift motor is lifting • Loose connection of height sensor.
the regular tray. the paper height 3. Check the connection of the upper
• The paper height sensor sensor limit sensor.
does not turn off within 10 • Defective upper limit 4. Check the connection of the lift motor
seconds after the lift motor sensor encoder sensor.
starts to lower the regular • Loose connection of 5. Check the connection of the lift motor.
tray. the upper limit sensor 6. Replace the paper height sensor.
• The upper limit sensor does • Defective lift motor 7. Replace the upper limit sensor.
not turn off within 10 • Loose connection of 8. Replace the lift motor encoder sensor.
seconds after the lift motor the lift motor 9. Replace the lift motor.
starts to lower the regular • Incorrect assembling
tray. of the lift motor
• The paper height sensor • Defective lift motor
does not turn on within 10 encoder sensor
seconds after the lift motor • Loose connection of
starts to lift the regular tray. the lift motor encoder
• The controller does not sensor
receive the signal from the
lift motor encoder sensor
within 50 milliseconds after
the lift motor starts.
SC 748 Booklet finisher The CPU tries to write data in • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
backup data the EEPROM three times, but • EEPROM not 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
error fails to write data. installed 3. Replace the EEPROM.
SC 749 Booklet finisher A communication-error alarm • The finisher controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit is not cleared for 3 seconds. cannot communicate 2. Check the connection between the
communication with the punch-unit finisher controller and the punch-unit
error controller. controller.
SC 750 Booklet finisher The checksum in the backup • Defective EEPROM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit data is inconsistent. (on the punch-unit 2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
controller error controller) 3. Replace the EEPROM.
• EEPROM not
installed
SM 4-41 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 751 Booklet finisher The paper edge and size • Defective sensors 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit sensors receive the 2.5-volt • Dirty sensors 2. Clean the sensors.
sensor error 1 light or weaker light even when 3. Replace the sensors.
the source emits 4.4-volt light.
SC 752 Booklet finisher • The registration motor • Incorrect assembly of 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit drives the slide unit to the the registration motor 2. Check the connection of the
registration rear side for 1 second. • Loose connection of registration motor.
motor error However, the home position the registration motor 3. Check the connection of the home
sensor does not turn on. • Defective home position sensor.
• The registration motor position sensor 4. Replace the home position sensor.
drives the slide unit to the • Loose connection of 5. Replace the registration motor.
front side for 1 second. the home position
However, the home position sensor
sensor does not turn off.
SC 753 Booklet finisher • The punch motor starts to • Malfunction of the 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit drive the punch cams. punch motor 2. Check that the connection of the
punch motor However, the controller • Loose connection of punch motor.
error does not receive the the punch motor 3. Check the connection of the home
encoder-lock signal for 60 • Defective home position sensor.
milliseconds. position sensor 4. Check the connection of the encoder
• The punch motor start to • Loose connection of sensor.
drive the punch cams. the home position 5. Replace the home position sensor.
However, the home sensor 6. Replace the encoder sensor.
positions sensor does not • Loose connection of 7. Replace the punch motor.
turn on for 250 milliseconds. the encoder sensor
• Defective encoder
sensor
SC 754 Booklet finisher The A/D inputs of the sensor • Defective sensor 1. Turn the main switch off and on. B
punch-unit are not corrected by varying • Dirty sensor 2. Clean the sensors.
sensor error 2 the D/A outputs. 3. Replace the sensors.
SC 818 Watch-dog While the system program is • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error running, other processes do • Software error 2. Replace the controller.
not operate at all. 3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table
B202/B178/B180 4-42 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 819 Fatal error
[696E] Process error System completely down • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[766D] Memory error Unexpected system memory • Defective ROM DIMM 2. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
size • Defective controller 3. Check and/or replace the ROM
• Software error DIMM.
4. Replace the controller.
5. See NOTE at the end of the SC
table.
[4361] Kernel stop The cache error trap occurs in • CPU cache error 1. Replace the controller. CTL
error the CPU.
Kernel stop Any error in the operation • Defective CPU 1. Replace the memory. CTL
error system (An error message is • Defective memory 2. Replace the controller.
output.) • Defective flash
memory
• Incorrect software
SC 820 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0001] CPU error During the self-diagnostic, the • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
to controller CPU detects an problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
[06FF] error. There are 47 types of • Defective controller firmware.
error code (0001 to 4005) 3. Replace the controller.
depending on the cause of the
error. The CPU detects an When the problem cannot be fixed with
error and displays the specific the above procedure, the following
error code with the program information displayed on the screen
address where the error needs to be fed back to a technical
occurs. support center.
• SC code
• Detailed error code
• Program address
SM 4-43 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
[0702] CPU/Memory • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[0709] Error problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
[070A] • Defective RAM-DIMM software.
• Defective controller 3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
4. Replace the controller.
[0801] CPU error Same as [0001] CTL
to
[4005]
SC 821 Self-diagnostics error: ASIC [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0B00] ASIC error The write-&-verify check error • Defective ASIC 1. Replace the controller. CTL
has occurred in the ASIC. device
[0D05] Self-diagnosis The CPU checks if the ASIC • System firmware 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error: ASIC timer works correctly problem 2. Reinstall the controller system
compared with the CPU timer. • Defective RAM-DIMM firmware.
If the ASIC timer does not • Defective controller 3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
function in the specified range, 4. Replace the controller board.
this SC code is displayed.
SC 822 Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[3003] Timeout error When the main switch is • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[3004] Command error turned on or starting the self- • Defective HDD 2. Check that the HDD is correctly
diagnostic, the HDD stays • Defective controller connected to the controller.
busy for the specified time or 3. Replace the HDD.
more. 4. Replace the controller.
SC 823 Self-diagnostic error: NIB [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[6101] MAC address The result of the MAC address • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
check sum error check sum does not match the 2. Replace the controller.
check sum stored in ROM.
[6104] PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controller
cannot be correctly
recognized.
[6105] PHY IC loop- An error occurred during the
back error loop-back test for the PHY IC
on the controller.
B202/B178/B180 4-44 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 824 Self-diagnosis The controller cannot • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
[1401] error: Standard recognize the standard • Defective standard 2. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly
NVRAM NVRAM installed or detects NVRAM inserted into the socket.
that the NVRAM is defective. • Defective controller 3. Replace the NVRAM.
4. Replace the controller.
SC 826 Self-diagnostic error: RTC [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[1501] Self-diagnostic • An RTC device is • RTC defective 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Error: RTC/ recognized, and the • NVRAM without RTC 2. Replace the NVRAM with another
Optional difference between the RTC installed NVRAM with an RTC device.
NVRAM device and the CPU • Backup battery
exceeds the defined limit. discharged
• No RTC device is
recognized.
[15FF] Self-diagnostic • The RTC device is not • NVRAM without RTC 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Error: RTC/ detected. installed 2. Replace the NVRAM with another
Optional • Backup battery NVRAM with an RTC device.
NVRAM discharged
SC 827 Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0201] Verification Error detected during a • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error write/verify check for the • Defective SDRAM 2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM 3. Replace the controller.
DIMM). • Defective controller
[0202] Resident The SPD values in all RAM • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. CTL
memory error DIMM are incorrect or • Defective SPD ROM
unreadable. on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus
SC 828 Self-diagnostic error : ROM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0101] Check sum The boot monitor and OS • Defective ROM DIMM 1. Turn the main switch on and off. CTL
error 1 program stored in the ROM • Defective controller 2. Replace the ROM DIMM
DIMM is checked. If the check 3. Replace the controller.
sum of the program is
incorrect, this SC code is
displayed.
SM 4-45 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
[0104] Check sum All areas of the ROM DIMM
error 2 are checked. If the check sum
of all programs stored in the
ROM DIMM is incorrect, this
SC code is displayed.
SC 829 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0302] Composition The result of checking the • Not specified RAM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error (Slot 0) composition data of the RAM DIMM installed 2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
in Slot 0 (CN5) on the • Defective RAM DIMM 3. Replace the controller board.
controller is incorrect.
[0401] Verification The data stored in the RAM in
error (Slot 1) Slot 1 does not match the data
when reading.
[0402] Composition The result of checking the
error (Slot 1) composition data of the RAM
in Slot 1 (CN6) on the
controller is incorrect.
SC 840 EEPROM An error has occurred during Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the CTL
access error I/O processing. controller.
SC 841 EEPROM read The EEPROM stores three Defective EEPROM 1. Replace the EEPROM on the CTL
error different data in mirrored controller.
areas.
SC 850 Network The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
interface error 2. Replace the controller.
SC 851 IEEE1394 The 1394 interface is • Defective IEEE1394 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
interface error unusable. • Defective controller. 2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface
board.
3. Replace the controller.
SC 853 Wireless LAN The wireless LAN card is not • Loose connection SC 854 1. Check the connection. CTL
card not detected before
detected communication is established,
though the wireless LAN board
is detected.
B202/B178/B180 4-46 SM
SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 854 Wireless LAN The wireless LAN card is not • Loose connection SC 853 1. Check the connection. CTL
card not detected after communication
detected is established, though the
wireless LAN board is
detected.
SC 855 Wireless LAN An error is detected in the • Loose connection 1. Check the connection. CTL
card error wireless LAN card. • Defective wireless 2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
LAN card
SC 856 Wireless LAN An error is detected in the • Defective wireless 1. Check the connection. CTL
card error wireless LAN board. LAN board 2. Replace the wireless LAN board.
• Loose connection
SC 857 USB interface The USB interface cannot be • Defective USB driver 1. Check the connection. CTL
error used due to a driver error. • Loose connection 2. Replace the USB board.
SC 860 HDD: The controller detects that the • HDD not initialized 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
Initialization hard disk fails. • Defective HDD 2. Reformat the HDD.
error 3. Replace the HDD.
SC 861 HDD: Reboot The HDD does not become • Loose connection 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error ready within 30 seconds after • Defective cables 2. Check the connection between the
the power is supplied to the • Defective HDD HDD and controller.
HDD. • Defective controller 3. Check and replace the cables.
4. Replace the HDD.
5. Replace the controller.
SC 863 HDD: Read The data stored in the HDD • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error cannot be read correctly. • Defective controller 2. Replace the HDD.
3. Replace the controller.
SC 864 HDD: CRC While reading data from the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error HDD or storing data in the 2. Replace the HDD.
HDD, data transmission fails.
SC 865 HDD: Access An error is detected while • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error operating the HDD. 2. Replace the HDD.
SC 866 SD card A correct license is not found • SD-card data has 1. Store correct data in the SD card. CTL
authentication in the SD card. corrupted.
error
SM 4-47 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE Rev. 07/05/2006
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
SC 867 SD card error The SD card is ejected from • The SD card is 1. Install the SD card. CTL
the slot. ejected from the slot. 2. Turn the main switch off and on.
SC 868 SD card access An error report is sent from the • An error is detected in 1. For a file system error, format the SD CTL
error SD card reader. the SD card. card on your PC.
243-252: File 2. For a device error, turn the mains
system error switch off and on.
253: Device 3. Replace the SD card.
error 4. Replace the controller.
SC 870 Address book An error is detected in the data • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error copied to the address book program 2. Initialize the address book data (SP5-
over a network. • Defective HDD 846-050).
• Incorrect path to the 3. Initialize the user information (SP5-
sever 832-006).
4. Replace the HDD.
SC 872 HDD mail data An error is detected in the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error HDD at machine initialization. • Power failure during 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-
an access to the HDD 007).
3. Replace the HDD.
SC 873 HDD mail An error is detected in the • Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
transfer error HDD at machine initialization. • Power failure during 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-
an access to the HDD 008).
3. Replace the HDD.
SC 880 File format The file format converter does • Defective file format 1. Turn the main switch off on. CTL
converter error not respond. converter 2. Replace the file format converter.
SC 900 Electric counter Abnormal data is stored in the • Defective NVRAM 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
error counters. • Defective controller 2. Check the connection between the
NVRAM and controller.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
4. Replace the controller.
⇒
B202/B178/B180 4-48 SM
Rev. 07/05/2006 SC TABLE
Related
SC No. Item Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedure Type
SCs
⇒ SC 901 Mechanical
total counter
The mechanical counter is not
connected.
• The counter is
manually ejected.
1. Make sure that the counter is
correctly installed.
D
error 1 NOTE: This error is detected • Loose connection 2. Replace the counter.
⇒ SC 902 Mechanical by the North America
model only.
• Defective counter 3. Check that the DIP-switch setting is
correct (
5.10).
total counter • Incorrect DIP-switch
error 2 setting
SC 920 Printer An error is detected in the • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
application error printer application program. • Unexpected hardware
resource (e.g.,
memory shortage)
SC 921 Printer font A necessary font is not found • A necessary font is 1. Check that the SD card stores correct CTL
error in the SD card. not found in the SD data.
card.
• The SD card data is
corrupted.
SC 925 Net file function The management area or • Defective HDD • When SC 860-865 keep occurring: CTL
error management file on the HDD • Data inconsistency 1. Follow the troubleshooting
is corrupted. (e.g., caused by procedures.
power failure) • In other cases:
2. Turn the main switch off and on.
3. Initialize the net file partition.
4. Initialize the hard disk.
5. Replace the HDD.
SC 990 Software The software makes an • Defective software 1. Turn the main switch off and on. CTL
performance unexpected operation. • Defective controller 2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine
error • Software error main firmware.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table.
SC 991 Software The software has attempted to • Software program This SC is not displayed on the LCD CTL
continuity error perform an unexpected error (logging only).
operation. However, unlike SC • Internal parameter
990, the object of the error is incorrect, insufficient
continuity of the software. working memory.
SM 4-49 B202/178/B180
SC TABLE Rev. 07/05/2006
NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.
• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
• Summary sheet (SP mode “Printer SP”, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
• SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
• SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.)
• Image file which causes the problem, if possible
B202/B178/B180 4-50 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1
Start
Verification of
problem reported
from users
Can the
Ask customer to
problem be No
duplicate it.
duplicated?
Yes
Troubleshoot using
Image Quality? No the service manual
shooting
Trouble-
or technical bulletin.
Yes
B146T901.WMF
B202/B178/B180 4-51 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 15 February 2005
A B
Possible Symptoms
y Colour shift
Check the level of the Yes
Problem is related to
colour shift and follow All colour?
the scanner section.
the troubleshooting
guide if required.
Yes
Check connection
between the IPU/
Controller, or
replace the IPU.
Considerable Symptom
B146T902.WMF
B202/B178/B180 4-52 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
B146T903.WMF
B146T904.WMF
SM 4-53 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
B202/B178/B180 4-54 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Image density change When the machine is tuned When the machine is off, the If this is often pointed out by users who are very
(1) on in the morning (having environmental conditions can begin to particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
been unused for a while), the affect the machine’s development Adjustment (SP3-125-3) as a solution.
ID of the initial outputs may capability. When the main switch is
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
be relatively low or high, in tuned on, the machine starts a process
self-check.
which case the machine control self-check and adjusts the
needs to compensate by development parameters to achieve the
raising or lowering the ID proper development potential gap
during machine operation. without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
SM 4-55 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
B202/B178/B180 4-56 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Detailed Explanation
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the considerable image problems.
Vertical white lines In high temperature and In this condition, the drum sensitivity The drum sensitivity recovers, and this symptom
humidity conditions, vertical tends to drop. Since the image transfer disappears after waiting for about 5 minutes after
white lines may appear in efficiency differs between plain and thick this symptom has been observed.
halftone areas on thick paper paper, sensitivity drop may cause
after multiple prints of the changes in image transfer efficiency on
same image. thick paper, causing vertical white lines.
Dirty lines/bands or The cleaning blade of the transfer belt Check and replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.
background on 2nd cleaning may be worn away or damaged
side when the transfer belt cleaning unit
becomes close to its life (500KP).
Poor fusing / Fusing The type of paper selected in the printer Please instruct users to select the correct paper
offset driver does not match the paper type type in the printer driver.
used for printing, causing the fusing
temperature not to be controlled for the
paper used.
Smeared image When making prints of an The paper’s trailing edge tends to flip up Please instruct users to select 1800x600 or
original with a solid image and come very close to the fusing belt 1200x1200dpi.
near the trailing, a smeared after it passes the paper transfer unit.
image may appear. The static electricity built up on the
fusing belt may cause toner to move,
resulting in the smeared image.
This is most noticeable with 600x600dpi
printing.
SM 4-57 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
B202/B178/B180 4-58 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
SM 4-59 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
B202/B178/B180 4-60 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
SM 4-61 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Black ballpoint pen FC This symptom is caused by the characteristic of Specify “Darker” level in the following menu:
images are colored. ballpoint pen ink. > Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
Generation copy makes FC Generation copy is executed in the text mode. Select “Photo” as the original type.
less colorful images. Photo images become less colorful.
Maps are incorrectly FC The Map Mode uses CMYK toner to create black • Specify “Darker” level in the following menu:
colored. letters. Sometimes black images are somewhat > Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
colored. • Raise the “Sharp” level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
The ACS does not ACS Darker images are sometimes incorrectly taken Specify “Full Color” in the following menu:
correctly distinguish as black & white images. > Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
between color and black & Color Image > ACS Priority
white images.
Color images are FC, When the following originals are used, color Raise the “Photo” level in the following menu:
enclosed by black lines. Text/Photo images are sometimes incorrectly taken as black > Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity > Photo
Black letters are enclosed letters, or black letters are incorrectly enclosed
by while lines. by white lines:
• Outputs from a printer (laser or ink-jet)
• Copied images
Black letters and black FC, Black letters and lines are colored when the Raise the “Text” level in the following menu:
lines are colored. Text/Photo background of the original is not clear. > Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity
NOTE: If you raise the “Text” level too much, some
weaker images are enclosed by black lines.
Mono color images are B&W, This symptom is based on the copier Raise the “Soft” level in the following menu:
not sharp enough. Text/Photo, characteristics. > Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Soft
ACS
B202/B178/B180 4-62 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
SM 4-63 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
rear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position of
the side fences.
B202/B178/B180 4-64 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following table shows the symptoms,
factors, action required, and the page to see for details.
SM 4-65 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 µm The flowchart illustrates the procedure to adjust line positions.
NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150µm. Keep the color shift in the range of 0 to
Start 150µm.
Yes
A End
B146T906.WMF
B202/B178/B180 4-66 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
End
B146T907.WMF
SM 4-67 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Sub-scan Leading Color shift, Registration roller Normal Paper SP1-004- Check the magenta line position against the black line.
edge especially 100 mm speed is not 004 If the registration roller is too fast or slow, the magenta
1200 dpi
from the leading suitable for the line appears above or below the black line.
edge. paper used. Normal Paper SP1-004- Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
005
600 dpi
Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
(Refer to pattern 1 in Thick Paper SP1-005- When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.05
the "How to measure 003
1200 dpi steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
the gap between
Then, repeat this until the shift between magenta and
color lines" (by-pass feed) black is minimized.
described after this
table.) NOTE: If the registration roller is too fast, magenta jitter
may appear at 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at 165
mm from the trailing edge. This is caused by
the mechanical shock when the trailing edge of
the paper passes the registration rollers.
Trailing Color shift, Fusing roller Normal Paper SP1-004- Check the magenta line position against the black line.
edge especially 100 mm speed is not 001 If the fusing roller is too fast or slow, the magenta line
1200 dpi
from the trailing suitable for the appears above or below the black line.
edge. paper used. Normal Paper SP1-004-
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
002
600 dpi Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
(Refer to pattern 2 in Thick Paper SP1-004- When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.1
the "How to measure 007
1200 dpi steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
the gap between
Then, repeat this step until the shift between magenta
color lines" (by-pass feed) and black is minimized.
described after this
table.)
B202/B178/B180 4-68 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Sub-scan Entire Color shift on the SP mode setting Normal Paper SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image, and is not suitable for 016 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
600 dpi
the amount of shift the paper used. Convert the measured value from [µm] to [dots] with the
SP5-993-
from leading to following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
017 (M)
trailing edge is dot value in the SP mode.
almost the same. SP5-993-
018 (C) Correction [dots] = Measured value [µm] / 21.2 or 42.4
600 dpi mode: 1 dot = 42.4 µm
Normal Paper SP5-993- 1200 dpi mode: 1 dot = 21.2 µm
019 (Y)
1200 dpi If color (YMC) has shifted up in relation to black, add the
SP5-993- above value to the current value.
020 (M)
If color (YMC) has shifted down in relation to black,
SP5-993- subtract the above value from the current value.
021 (C)
Examples
• If the magenta line has shifted up in relation to black
by 40µm in 600dpi mode, add 1 to the current setting
of SP5-993-017.
Correction [dots] = +(40/42.4) = Approx. +1
• If the magenta line has shifted down in relation to
black by 70µm in 600dpi mode, subtract 2 from the
current setting of SP5-993-17.
Correction [dots] = -(70/42.4) = Approx. –2
SM 4-69 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Main-scan Entire Color shifts on the Main-scan - SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image, and magnification is 013 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
the amount of shift not correctly Convert the measured value [mm] to [%] with the
SP5-993-
differs at front, adjusted. following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
014 (M)
center, and rear. value in the SP mode
SP5-993-
Correction [%] = Measured value [mm] / 287 x 10000
015 (C)
(Refer to pattern 3 in If the color line is enlarged in relation to black, add the
the How to measure correction value to the current setting.
the gap between
If the color line is reduced in relation to black, subtract
color lines described
the correction value from the current setting.
after this table.)
NOTE: Line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Auto
Adjust” in User Program mode) should be done
to check the result after changing the main-
scan magnification data. This is because the
changes will affect the line position adjustment.
Examples
• If the magenta line is enlarged by 0.1mm in relation to
the black line, add “4” to the current setting of SP5-
993-014.
Correction [%] = (0.1/287) x 10000 = Approx. +4
• If the magenta line is reduced by 0.05 mm in relation
to the black line, subtract “2” from the current setting
of SP5-993-014.
Correction [%] = -(0.05/287) x 10000 = Approx. -2
B202/B178/B180 4-70 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Action Required
Direction Area Symptom Possible Cause Procedure / Remarks
Output Mode SP Mode
Main-scan Entire Color shifts on the Main-scan - SP5-993- Measure the gap between the black line and other
image entire image and registration is not 010 (Y) colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
amount of shifts is correctly Convert the measured value [µm] to [dots] with the
SP5-993-
almost the same at adjusted. following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
011 (M)
front, center, and dot value in the SP mode.
rear sides. SP5-993-
012 (C) Correction [dots] = Measured value [µm] / 21.2
If color (YMC) has shifted to the left in relation to black,
(Refer to pattern 4 in add the above value to the current setting.
the How to measure
the gap between If color (YMC) has shifted to the right in relation to black,
color lines described subtract the above value from the current setting.
after this table.) Examples
• If the magenta line has shifted to the left by 40µm,
add 4 to the current setting of SP5-993-011
Correction [dots] = +(40/21.2) = Approx. +2
• If the magenta line has shifted to the right by 70µm,
subtract 3 from the current setting of SP5-993-011.
Correction [dots] = -(70/21.2) = Approx. -3
Front or The amount of color • Side fence - - • Check if the side fences of the paper trays are
rear shift at the front and position correctly positioned. If there is clearance between the
rear sides becomes • Transfer belt paper and the side fences, this causes paper to skew
gradually bigger position during paper transport.
toward the trailing • Check if the transfer belt is in correct position, if the
edge. tension springs are correctly set, or if the paper
attraction roller is correctly installed..
(
3.7.4 Transfer Belt)
SM 4-71 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
A
How to measure the gap between color A
lines
Use a magnification scope to measure the
gap [A] between the two lines. Measure the
distance between the same sides of the two
lines. For example (see the illustration),
measure between the left edges of the lines.
Magnification Black
scope line Color B178T908.WMF
Pattern 1 line
Pattern 2
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the
trailing edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the fusing roller speed is too high
for the paper used. Therefore, the fusing
roller speed needs to be slower. To do this,
decrease the setting (percentage) of SP1-
004-001, 002, or 007. This depends on the
mode selected.
• SP1-004-001 Normal paper, B178T913.WMF
Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)
• SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, C2b: 162 mm/s)
• SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)
B202/B178/B180 4-72 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
Pattern 3
Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction
Fig. 1 and 2 shows that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the black
line. The amount of shift is not the same as at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig.
1 and Fig. 2 show that the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomes
larger from left to right in Fig. 1. Cyan and magenta become larger from right to left.
This is because the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.
shooting
Trouble-
B178T910.WMF
B178T911.WMF
Pattern 4
Color shift (registration) in the main-
scan direction
B178T912.WMF
SM 4-73 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
NOTE: You need to do each adjustment with the paper type normally used by
the customer.
4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3. At times,
a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount of color shift
between colors.
5. Go to the next step (fusing/registration roller speed adjustment) if the result is
not within the target.
B202/B178/B180 4-74 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
shooting
Trouble-
3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge) if the color has
shifted within 100 mm from the leading edge.
NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as for
normal 1200 dpi mode.
2. Check if there is any color shift from the black line by the same amount all the
way down the page from leading to trailing edge. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image) if there is.
SM 4-75 B202/B178/B180
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
3. A horizontal band may show at 60 mm (2.76") from the leading edge on A3 (11"
x 17") paper. This depends on the paper used. Decrease the setting of SP1-
004-006 in 0.05% steps until the problem is solved if the horizontal band shows
on the 2-dot pattern.
B202/B178/B180 4-76 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2
shooting
Trouble-
2. The black toner [E] is transferred
in the blank space. [E]
B178T920.WMF
[F]
Black Over Print Enabled
Black lines and color background are [A]
printed as follows:
Y Y Y [B]
1. The color toner (for example, M M M
[C]
magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C]. [D]
K
2. The black toner [D] is transferred Y Y Y
on the color toner. 1 M M M
K
An unexpected white line does not Y Y Y
show even if the line position of the
black toner is not correct.
1 M M M
B178T921.WMF
SM 4-77 B202/B178/B180
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
B202/B178/B180 4-78 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
shooting
Trouble-
C: 206-A4 Toner near end may be detected
M: 206-A1 Shorted even when the toner near end
condition is not satisfied.
Drum gear K: 213-13 Open SC440
position sensor CMY: 210-B12 Shorted
Open Dancing control does not function.
Belt mark sensor 215-3
Shorted
Waste toner near full message
Open shows, even when a waste toner
near full condition does not exist.
Waste toner
213-4 Waste toner near full message is
sensor
not shown even when a waste toner
Shorted
near full condition exists. This
causes a waste toner leak.
NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.
SM 4-79 B202/B178/B180
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
B202/B178/B180 4-80 SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
!CAUTION
Make sure that the data-in LED (!) is not on before you go into the SP mode.
This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is
on, wait for the copier to process the data.
Entering SP Mode
"# 1. Press the Clear Mode key.
$%&# 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.
'# 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
4. Enter the Service Mode.
Exiting SP Mode
Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
Service
Tables
SM 5-1 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B178S910.WMF
B202/B178/B180 5-2 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
! " # $ %
& ' ( )
,
B178S911.WMF
Service
Tables
operation.
& Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
' Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
( Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
) Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
* Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
SM 5-3 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B178S912.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.
5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press " to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
• Press ( to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a
number that is out of range.)
• Press “Yes” when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window
and select the settings for the test print. Press Start ) and then press SP
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Exiting Service Mode
Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
B202/B178/B180 5-4 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
NOTE: You must turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode to
make the following settings effective.
SP Modes Related to the Engine SP Modes Related to the Controller
SP2-208-009 SP5-302-002
SP2-213-001 SP5-801-003 to 013
SP2-224-001 to 004 SP5-824-001
SP5-150-001 SP5-825-001
SP5-994-001 and 002 SP5-832-001 to 011
SP5-998-001
SP5-999
NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changes
will affect the next line position adjustment.
Service
Tables
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is
turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to “1” if you must use the printer bit
switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP 5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed
servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
SM 5-5 B202/B178/B180
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is
limited to 20 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the
screen need to be abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP
modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Process Speed
L: Low speed – 81 mm/s (for all models)
M: Middle speed – 125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)
H: High speed – 185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the model,
the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP
mode settings depend on the process speed.
B202/B178/B180 5-6 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory
setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main
switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this
mode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to
the default value. “BCU” and “CTL” show which NVRAM contains the data.
• BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board
• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP
table in the following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the
setting of the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric
characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in
the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
SP number set in bold-italic (e.g. x-001-1):
This denotes a “Special Service Program” mode setting.
Service
Tables
SM 5-7 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-8 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
images in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.
1005 2 [YMC] *BCU [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step] FA
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.
The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-005 (see the note for SP
1-004).
At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. This
SP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.
1005 3 [YMC] Thick *BCU [-0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode.
The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-004 (see the note for SP
1-004).
Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes color
shift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thick
paper.
SM 5-9 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-10 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Sets the pressure roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after the
pressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 28 H: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the heating
roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 29 P: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the
pressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
1104 31 Temp Control *BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: off
1: out of FD/FUS S ON
2: on
Selects the temperature control.
SM 5-11 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
B202/B178/B180 5-12 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
1106 [Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1106 1 Heat Roller [0 to 230 / - / 5°C/step]
1106 2 Pressure Roller
SM 5-13 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
B202/B178/B180 5-14 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness to
increase.
To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures are
decreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified in
this SP mode, until the end of the job.
The temperatures are decreased in two steps.
Example: Middle speed
First step (also called “Mode 1”): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by
5°C (SP 1-914-2).
Second step (also called “Mode 2”): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature drops
by 10°C (SP 1-914-7).
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
1913 1 Mode 1 H *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 2 Mode 1 M *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 3 Mode 1 L *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 4 Mode 1 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 5 Mode 1 H wide *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 6 Mode 2 H *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 7 Mode 2 M *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 8 Mode 2 L *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 9 Mode 2 H narrow *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
1913 10 Mode 2 H wide *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
SM 5-15 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
B202/B178/B180 5-16 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
• Jam recovery
• Door open
• Using Fax
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed after the fusing unit
becomes ready when a print job arrives at the copier.
SM 5-17 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-18 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2001 [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)
U: Upper, L: Lower
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-
125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,
the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
2001 1 DC:[K] *BCU [300 to 1000 / 620 / 10 -volts/step] DFU
2001 2 DC:[Y] *BCU
2001 3 DC:[M] *BCU
2001 4 DC:[C] *BCU
• Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machine
initialization or process control self-check.
• Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.
2001 5 AC:[K] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 6 AC:[K] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 7 AC:[K] H [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 8 AC:[Y] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 9 AC:[Y] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 10 AC:[M] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 11 AC:[M] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
2001 12 AC:[C] L [0 to 255 / 170 0 / 1/step] DFU
2001 13 AC:[C] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
Sets the target of the AC bias for black.
The actual target of AC bias is calculated by the machine.
2001 14 AC Target [K] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU
2001 15 AC Target [Y] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 78, C2b: 116 / 1/step] DFU
2001 16 AC Target [M] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU
2001 17 AC Target [C] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 78, C2b: 116 / 1/step] DFU
Service
Tables
2101 [TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment
This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).
2103 1 front *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 2 back *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 3 lead *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 4 trail *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
SM 5-19 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-20 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan
(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left side
of an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).
When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.
When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
2150 1 Y: Area1 *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2150 2 Y: Area2 *BCU
2150 3 Y: Area3 *BCU
2150 4 Y: Area4 *BCU
2150 5 Y: Area5 *BCU
2150 6 Y: Area6 *BCU
2150 7 Y: Area7 *BCU
2150 8 Y: Area8 *BCU
2150 9 Y: Area9 *BCU
2150 10 Y: Area10 *BCU
2150 11 Y: Area11 *BCU
2150 12 Y: Area12 *BCU
2150 13 M: Area1 *BCU [–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2150 14 M: Area2 *BCU
2150 15 M: Area3 *BCU
2150 16 M: Area4 *BCU
2150 17 M: Area5 *BCU
2150 18 M: Area6 *BCU
2150 19 M: Area7 *BCU
SM 5-21 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-22 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
2152 37 Y: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.78 / 0.01%/step]
2152 38 Y: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.04 / 0.01%/step]
2152 39 Y: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.33 / 0.01%/step]
2152 40 Y: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.70 / 0.01%/step]
2152 41 Y: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.19 / 0.01%/step]
2152 42 Y: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.81 / 0.01%/step]
2152 43 Y: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
2152 44 Y: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.43 / 0.01%/step]
2152 45 Y: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.40 / 0.01%/step]
2152 46 Y: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.46/ 0.01%/step]
2152 47 Y: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.58/ 0.01%/step]
2152 48 Y: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.73/ 0.01%/step]
2152 49 Y: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 50 Y: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
2152 51 Y: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.28 / 0.01%/step]
2152 52 Y: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 53 Y: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]
2152 54 Y: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.80 / 0.01%/step]
2152 55 Y: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.99 / 0.01%/step]
2152 56 Y: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.20 / 0.01%/step]
2152 57 Y: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]
2152 58 Y: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]
2152 59 Y: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.11 / 0.01%/step]
SM 5-23 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-24 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
2201 [Development Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)
Adjusts the development bias.
Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
2201 1 [K] L *BCU [200 to 800 / 500 / 10 –V/step] DFU
2201 2 [K] M *BCU
2201 3 [K] H *BCU
2201 4 [Y] L *BCU
2201 5 [Y] M *BCU
2201 6 [M] L *BCU
2201 7 [M] M *BCU
2201 8 [C] L *BCU
2201 9 [C] M *BCU
SM 5-25 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-26 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2212 [Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])
When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,
the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.
2212 1 Start [K] *BCU [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step]
2212 2 Start [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.
The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 times
consecutively.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
2212 5 Near [K] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step]
2212 6 Near [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.
The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.
Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
2212 7 End [K] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step]
2212 8 End [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed after
toner near-end has been detected.
When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machine
detects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even
during a print job.
Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full image coverage
Service
Tables
NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.
2212 9 Pixel [K] *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
2212 10 Pixel [YMC] *BCU
Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end has
been detected.
However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stops
printing even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.
Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V
2212 11 Min. Print *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can be
weak when the value is larger.
Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath the
toner cartridge. Each sensor outputs “0” when it detects toner in the toner path, or
outputs “1” when it does not detect toner. The signal is “1” if toner is not passing
through the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, “0”
and “1”, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. When
enough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (“0” or its
vicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (“1” or its vicinity).
2212 12 sensor avg [K] *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step]
2212 13 sensor avg [Y]
2212 14 sensor avg [M]
2212 15 sensor avg [C]
SM 5-27 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-28 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
2301 4 [K]P D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 μA/step]
2301 6 [K]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 μA/step]
2301 7 [K]B S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 μA/step]
2301 8 [FC,K]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 9 [FC, K]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 10 [FC,Y]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 11 [FC,Y]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 12 [FC,M]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 13 [FC,M]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 14 [FC,C]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 15 [FC,C]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 16 [FC,K]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 17 [FC,K]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 μA/step]
2301 18 [FC,Y]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 19 [FC,Y]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 20 [FC,M]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 21 [FC,M]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 22 [FC,C]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 μA/step]
2301 23 [FC,C]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 μA/step]
2301 24 [FC,K]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 25 [FC,K]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
2301 26 [FC,Y]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 μA/step]
2301 27 [FC,Y]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 μA/step]
SM 5-29 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-30 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
[Transfer Cur.] Transfer Current - Environment Correction
2310 Applies the transfer current correction if the humidity exceeds the current set
value.
2301 1 H Humidity *BCU [25 to 90 / 55 / 5%/step]
SM 5-31 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-32 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
2802 [PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP
Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.
When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows to
the non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. This
may cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.
To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “1.5.”
NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasing
the current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.
2802 1 N LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
2802 2 N A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
2802 3 TH LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
2802 4 TH A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
2802 5 OHP LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step]
2802 7 MTH LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
2802 8 MTH A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
2909 [Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
main scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line
position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010
to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the
next line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
1 dot = 20μ
2909 1 [Y] DOT *BCU [-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU
2909 2 [M] DOT *BCU
2909 3 [C] DOT *BCU
2909 4 [K] DOT *BCU
2909 9 [Y] 1/16 DOT *BCU [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot/step] DFU
2909 10 [M] 1/16 DOT *BCU
2909 11 [C] 1/16 DOT *BCU
2909 12 [K] 1/16 DOT *BCU
SM 5-33 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
[LD Pulse]
2920 Enables or disables the LD pulse area correction (SP2-150).
When the "0" is selected, the setting values of the SP2-150 become 0.
NOTE: Set the "Disable" after replacing the laser optics-housing unit.
2920 1 OFF/ON *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
B202/B178/B180 5-34 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP3-XXX (Process)
3005 [TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])
3005 1 [K] Initializes the developer. DFU
3005 2 [Y]
3005 3 [M]
3005 4 [C]
3005 5 [All Color]
3005 6 Result *BCU [1 to 9 / - / -]
1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order K Y C M.
e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded - 4.1.1.
3006 1 Vcnt Display [K] *BCU Displays the initial Vcnt value.
3006 2 Vcnt Display [Y] *BCU [0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]
Service
Tables
3006 3 Vcnt Display [M] *BCU
3006 4 Vcnt Display [C] *BCU
3006 5 Target [Bk] *BCU Adjusts the target Vcnt for the initial setting.
3006 6 Target [Y] *BCU [0 to 5.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 V/step]
3006 7 Target [M] *BCU
3006 8 Target [C] *BCU
SM 5-35 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
3008 [Humidity]
3008 1 Humidity [0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]
Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.
3008 2 Temp 1 [0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]
Shows the temperature measured
by thermistor 2 on the laser optics
unit.
3008 3 Temp 2
Shows the temperature measured
by thermistor 1 on the laser optics
unit
B202/B178/B180 5-36 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Displays the current Vk value.
3122 1 [K] *BCU [-255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
3122 2 [Y] *BCU Normal Range: -50 to 50
3122 3 [M] *BCU
3122 4 [C] *BCU
SM 5-37 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-38 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
3903 6 CF [Y] *BCU
3903 7 CF [M] *BCU
3903 8 CF [C] *BCU
SM 5-39 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
3905 [Intrvl Procon] M/A Target for Paper Interval Process Control
Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.
These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changing
these values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.
3905 1 Intrvl [K] *BCU [0 to 1.50 / 0.25 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3905 2 Intrvl [Y] *BCU
3905 3 Intrvl [M] *BCU
3905 4 Intrvl [C] *BCU
Displays the amount of each toner on the paper.
A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if
the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than ±0.03
mg/cm2).
Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if the
value is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism
3905 5 Intrvl [K] *BCU [0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]
3905 6 Intrvl [Y] *BCU
3905 7 Intrvl [M] *BCU
3905 8 Intrvl [C] *BCU
3905 9 Gamma Correct [K] *BCU [–0.50 to 0.50 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
3905 10 Gamma Correct [Y] *BCU
3905 11 Gamma Correct [M] *BCU
3905 12 Gamma Correct [C] *BCU
B202/B178/B180 5-40 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
3912 2 [Y] *BCU
3912 3 [M] *BCU
3912 4 [C] *BCU
SM 5-41 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-42 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
every job.)
SM 5-43 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-44 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4008 [SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
4008 1 SubScanMagnification *CTL [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
Service
Tables
Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
4013 1 Lamp: OFF
4013 2 Lamp: ON
SM 5-45 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-46 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
4540 [Printer V]
4540 1 R: Option *CTL Specifies the printer vector correction value.
4540 2 R: R [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4540 3 R: G
4540 4 R: B
4540 5 Y: Option
4540 6 Y: R
4540 7 Y: G
4540 8 Y: B
4540 9 G: Option
4540 10 G: R
4540 11 G: G
Service
Tables
4540 12 G: B
4540 13 C: Option
4540 14 C: R
4540 15 C: G
4540 16 C: B
4540 17 B: Option
4540 18 B: R
4540 19 B: G
4540 20 B: B
4540 21 M: Option
4540 22 M: R
4540 23 M: G
4540 24 M: B
SM 5-47 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
4551 [SApli: Txt OCR 1] Scanner Application: Text OCR (except drop out color) DFU
4551 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4551 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4551 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4551 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4552 [SApli: Txt OCR 2] Scanner Application: Text OCR (drop out color) DFU
4552 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4552 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4552 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4552 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
B202/B178/B180 5-48 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
4560 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4560 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4561 [SApli: sRGB: Per] Scanner Application: sRGB: Printing Paper/Photo DFU
4561 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
4561 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
4561 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
4561 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
SM 5-49 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-50 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
4654 [R Black Adjustment: Prev] Red CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
4623 1 R EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even red signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4623 2 R ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4623 5 R BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even red signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).
4623 6 R BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).
4655 [G Black Adjustment: Prev] Green CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
4655 1 G EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
4655 2 G ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
4655 5 G BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).
Service
Tables
4655 6 G BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).
4656 [B Black Adjustment: Prev] Blue CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
4656 1 B EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4656 2 B ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
4656 5 B BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the
even blue signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).
4656 6 B BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the
odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).
SM 5-51 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-52 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
0: OK, 1: Error
- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displays
the result.
4904 2 Test2: Image Path Bit0: ASIC1 to ASIC3
Bit1: ASIC0 to ASIC1
Bit2: ASIC0 to ASIC1
Bit3: ASIC1 to ASIC2
Bit4: ASIC3 to ASIC1
Bit5: ASIC3 to ASIC1
Bit6: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (MC)
Bit7: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (YK)
0: OK, 1: Error
- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram
Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.
Service
Tables
Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
4905 1 Dither Selection *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
SM 5-53 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-54 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE
SP5-XXX (Mode)
Service
5104 [A3/DLT Double Count]
Tables
Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for 11 X 17 inch size prints.
5104 1 Double Count *CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal count
1: Double count
2: Normal count for unknown size
SM 5-55 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
5120 [Mode Clear Opt. Counter *CTL [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not
Removal] used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
5120 1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or
remove an optional counter, check the settings.
5131 [Paper Size Type *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]
Selection]
5131 1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB
system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]
5162 1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
5169 1 CE Login *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B202/B178/B180 5-56 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th and 5th digits: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
6th digit: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".
5307 4 Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".
SM 5-57 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
5505 [Error Alarm] *CTL [0 to 255 / 19 / 100 copies /step] Japan only
B202/B178/B180 5-58 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5508 12* Jam Detection: Continuous [ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
Count
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5508 13* Door Open: Time Length [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
5508 21* Jam Operation: Time Length 0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
5508 22* Jam Operation: Continuous 0: Automatic Call
Count 1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.
5508 23* Door Operation: Time Length 0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).
Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service
center. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.
SM 5-59 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
5801 11 NCS
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
B202/B178/B180 5-60 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5802 [EngineFreeRun]
5802 1 EngineFreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
NOTE:
• The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT
printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but
paper is not fed.
• The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a
test.
Service
Tables
5808 [Destination Code] Destination Code Display
Displays the destination code.
5808 1 Destination *BCU [ 0 to 3 / 0 / – ]
0: DOM
1: NA
2: EURO
3: ASIA
SM 5-61 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-62 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL
5828 50 1284 Compatibility Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.
(Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
5828 52 ECP (Centro) Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is
set to "1".
5828 65 Job Spooling Enables/disables Job Spooling.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
5828 66 Job Spooling Clear: Start Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at
Time power on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
SM 5-63 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-64 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Tables
5836 084 Format for Printer Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.
5836 085 Format for Printer B&W 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 086 Format for Printer B&W HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 091 Default for JPEG [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
SM 5-65 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-66 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5844 [USB]
5844 1 Transfer Rate *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Auto Change
1: Full speed
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
Service
Tables
5844 2 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
5844 3 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
5844 4 Device Release Number *CTL Displays the development release version
number. DFU
SM 5-67 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-68 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
address book data.
5846 98 Bit SW2 DFU
5846 99 Bit SW DFU
SM 5-69 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-70 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
5857 5 [Save to HDD] DFU
Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
5857 6 Save to SD Card
5857 9 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
5857 10 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
5857 11 Erase HDD Debug Data
5857 12 Erase SD Card Debug Data
5857 13 Free Space on SD Card
5857 14 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
5857 15 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
5857 16 Make HDD Debug
5857 17 Make SD Debug
SM 5-71 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-72 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
5866 5 Add Date Field
SM 5-73 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
⇒ 5886
5886 1
[Remote Firmware Update Function]
ROM Update 0: Yes 1 (Default)
1: No
Allows to access the ROM by the Remote Firmware Update Function
B202/B178/B180 5-74 SM
Rev. 02/2006 COPY SERVICE MODE
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection
Specifies the manufacturer and model name.
5907 1 Plug/Play *BCU [ 0 to 17 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA
Service
Tables
control of the display.
5913 102 Print Application Set *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ] DFU
SM 5-75 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE Rev. 02/2006
B202/B178/B180 5-76 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
5993 5 Stand-by *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
5993 6 Job Start *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print job
when the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the
temperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.
5993 7 Result *BCU
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.
SM 5-77 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-78 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
SP5-993-006 1 1 0 1 1 0
SP5-993-022 100 100 250 100 100 250
SP5-993-026 1 0 0 1 0 0
SP5-993-055 1 0 0 100 200 999
The adjustment numbers from 3 to 5 are for users who mainly use this machine for
black and white printing and copying.
Finely adjusts the main-scan registration. This SP can adjust the main scan
36 to 39
registration more precisely than the SP5993-10 to -12. Used for fine main scan offset.
5993 36 S: Off Set: [Y] *BCU [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA
5993 37 S: Off Set: [M] *BCU
5993 38 S: Off Set: [C] *BCU
5993 39 Execute *BCU
Use to make a rough line position adjustment. If color registration errors are more
than 1.4 mm, use this SP. After doing this SP, do SP5993-2 (Line position
adjustment).
5993 40 Color_Adj_level (for *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –] Alphanumeric
warming up)
Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is 60°C or less
immediately after the main power is turned on.
0: High (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration
adjustment twice)
1: Mid (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration
adjustment once)
SM 5-79 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-80 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
5997 [Test Pattern]
5997 1 Tray Selection [0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
0: By-pass Table 1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
Selects the tray for making a test print.
NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected
paper tray.
SM 5-81 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-82 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
SM 5-83 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
Setting 1 Setting 2
Bit 7 A4 (L) LT (L)
Bit 6 11" x 15" DLT (L)
Bit 5 DLT (L) 11" x 15"
Bit 4 LT (S) US Exec (S)
Bit 3 LT (L) 8" x 10" (L)
Bit 2 LG (L) F4 (L)
Bit 1 A4 (L) 16K (L)
Bit 0 8K (L) DLT (L)
B202/B178/B180 5-84 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
SM 5-85 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-86 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
7105 9 Used
Tables
7105 11 Index
7105 12 Others
SM 5-87 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-88 SM
Rev. 11/2005 COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
7504 69 Duplex Feed: OFF
Tables
7504 100 Finisher Entrance
7504 101 Finisher Shift Tray 1
7504 102 Finisher Shift Tray 2
7504 103 Finisher Staple
7504 104 Finisher Exit
7504 105 Finisher Drive
7504 106 Finisher Tray Up/Down
7504 107 Finisher Jogger
7504 108 Finisher Staple
7504 109 Finisher Exit
7504 110 Finisher Punch
7504 111 Finisher Jam Clear
⇒ 7504 120 Finisher Entrance: ON
⇒ 7504 121 Finisher Entrance: OFF
⇒ 7504 122 Finisher STACK Exit
⇒ 7504 123 Finisher Folder: ON
⇒ 7504 124 Finisher Folder: OFF
⇒ 7504 125 Finisher Stapler
⇒ 7504 126 Finisher Punch
⇒ 7504 127 Finisher Transport Motor
⇒ 7504 128 Finisher Paddle Motor
⇒ 7504 129 Finisher Stapler Slide Motor / Stapler Folder Motor
⇒ 7504 130 Finisher Jogger Motor
⇒ 7504 131 Finisher Lift Motor
SM 5-89 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-90 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 10.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
7803 1 Paper *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7803 2 S: PCU [K]
7803 3 S: PCU [Y]
7803 4 S: PCU [M]
7803 5 S: PCU [C]
7803 6 S: Dev. [K]
7803 7 S: Dev. [Y]
7803 8 S: Dev. [M]
7803 9 S: Dev. [C]
7803 10 S: Oil Supply
7803 11 PF By-pass
7803 12 PF Tray 1
7803 13 PF Tray 2
7803 14 PF Tray 3
7803 15 PF Tray 4
7803 16 S: Fusing
7803 17 S: Transfer
SM 5-91 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-92 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
7804 14 PF Tray 3
7804 15 PF Tray 4
7804 16 Fusing
7804 17 Transfer
7804 18 Trans Cln
7804 50 All
SM 5-93 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
7811 1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).
B202/B178/B180 5-94 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust
Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zero
SM 5-95 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-96 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web
(external network Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
applications, for (Software Development Kit) will also be counted
example) with this group in the future.
SM 5-97 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-98 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
Service
Tables
SM 5-99 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 001 T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
already on the document server is used.
8 007 O:Total Jobs *CTL
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is
specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
B202/B178/B180 5-100 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL document server by each application, to reveal how
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL local storage is being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
operation panel.
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL document server were stored on the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
Service
Tables
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
SM 5-101 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL to output documents from the document server.
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL printed from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL files on the document server that were later
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL accessed for transmission over the telephone
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
is sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to send
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL files from the document server over the
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL telephone line or over a network (attached to an
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
B202/B178/B180 5-102 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set
for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
8 06x 4 Bookle Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
t mode, the Staple counter also increments.
8 06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
SM 5-103 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
B202/B178/B180 5-104 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 123 IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color
SM 5-105 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-106 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
Service
Tables
perform identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL images.
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
SM 5-107 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL into the document server.
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
B202/B178/B180 5-108 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
Service
Tables
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the workload on the ADF.
8 231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
8 231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8 231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
SM 5-109 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
B202/B178/B180 5-110 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL features have been selected at the operation
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL panel for each application. Some examples of
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL • Erase> Border
• Erase> Center
• Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned
Service
Tables
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
SM 5-111 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-112 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
SM 5-113 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL by the customer. The counter for the application
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL used for storing the pages increments.
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
is counted for the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip-
sheets.
• Reports printed to confirm counts.
• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
• Test prints for machine image adjustment.
• Error notification reports.
• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
B202/B178/B180 5-114 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL application used to print the pages is
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
stored from within the document server mode
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
Service
Tables
SM 5-115 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
B202/B178/B180 5-116 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
Service
Tables
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with Other applications.
8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip-sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both side’s counts 2.
8 43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
SM 5-117 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-118 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
application.
8 464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8 466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other
SM 5-119 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip-sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by each application.
8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color
8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL in the Color Mode by the print application.
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Single Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
B202/B178/B180 5-120 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results, as they are both limited to the
Print application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
Service
Tables
SM 5-121 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
B202/B178/B180 5-122 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Single Color
8 584 3 Full Color
SM 5-123 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B202/B178/B180 5-124 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
Service
Tables
SM 5-125 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
B202/B178/B180 5-126 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
Service
Tables
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-
to-PC function with the LS applications.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
SM 5-127 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC
8 683 PCFAX TXPGS *CTL Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL the document server. The counter for the
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL application that was used to store the pages is
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored is counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
B202/B178/B180 5-128 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL This SP displays the percent of space
available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
SM 5-129 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-130 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8 941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8 941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8 941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
SM 5-131 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-132 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all
Tables
the scanner SP modes.
5801 10 Netfile application Deletes the network file application management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
5801 11 NCS All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)
(NCS: Network Control Service)
5801 12 IPU Clears the IPU settings
5801 13 R-Fax Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
5801 14 Clear DCS Settings Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
5801 15 Clear UCS Settings Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)
settings.
5801 16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
5801 17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
SM 5-133 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
5803 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
5803 1 Paper Tray 1
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Lift Sensor Activated
Deactivated (Actuator not
inside sensor)
2 Paper Height Sensor 1
See Table 1.
3 Paper Height Sensor 2
4 Tray Set Not set Set
5803 2 Paper Tray 2
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Lift Sensor Activated
Deactivated (Actuator not
inside sensor)
2 Paper Height Sensor 1 See Table 1.
3 Paper Height Sensor 2 1: Activated
(Actuator inside sensor)
4 Paper Size Switch 1
5 Paper Size Switch 2 See Table 2.
6 Paper Size Switch 3 1: Pushed
7 Paper Size Switch 4
5803 3 By-pass Table
0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected
1 Paper Size 1
2 Paper Size 2
See Table 3.
3 Paper Size 3
4 Paper Size 4
5803 4 Doors
0 Front Door Switch Opened Closed
1 Left Door Switch Opened Closed
2 Right Door Switch Opened Closed
3 Vertical Transport Switch Opened Closed
4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch Opened Closed
5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU) Opened Closed
5803 5 Paper Feed
0 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
B202/B178/B180 5-134 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
7 PCU - Y Not set Set
5803 10 Toner End Sens
0 Black Toner Not end End
1 Cyan Toner Not end End
2 Magenta Toner Not end End
3 Yellow Toner Not end End
5803 13 Others
0 LD H.P. Sensor Not H.P. H.P.
1 Transfer Belt Sensor Not contact Contact
2 - - -
3 Used Toner Sensor Not full Full
4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Set
5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K Activated
Deactivated (Actuator inside
sensor)
6 Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY Activated
Deactivated (Actuator inside
sensor)
SM 5-135 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
5803 Reading
Bit Description
0 1
5803 15 Mail Box 1 (Not used)
0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Tray 2 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
3 Tray 2 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Tray 3 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
5 Tray 3 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Tray 4 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
7 Tray 4 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5803 16 Mail Box 2 (Not used)
0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected
1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Door Safety Switch Opened Closed
NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),
LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).
B202/B178/B180 5-136 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
NOTES:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
Service
Tables
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2 1
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 0 1 1
A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 0 0 1
- B4 SEF 0 0 1 0
81/2" x 11" SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0
8" x 13" SEF F SEF 0 1 0 0
- A5 SEF 1 1 0 0
51/2" x 181/2" SEF B6 SEF 1 0 0 0
Post Card Post Card 0 0 0 0
SM 5-137 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-138 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5804 Description
5804 1 Lift M UP (1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP
5804 2 Lift M DOWN(1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN
5804 3 Lift M UP(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP
5804 4 Lift M DOWN(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN
5804 5 By-pass CL By-pass Feed Clutch
5804 6 Pick-up SOL Pick-up Solenoid
5804 7 PF CL (1) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1
5804 8 PF CL (2) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2
5804 9 PF GRP SOL Grip Roller Release Solenoid
5804 10 Regist CL Registration Clutch
5804 11 Junction SOL Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 12 Oil Supply SOL Oil Supply Unit Solenoid
5804 13 Fusing CL Fusing Clutch
5804 14 Wst Tn Vib M Waste Toner Vibration Motor
5804 19 K Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - K
5804 20 C Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - C
5804 21 M Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - M
5804 22 Y Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - Y
Service
Tables
5804 23 K Dev M H Development Motor - K / High Speed
5804 24 K Dev M M Development Motor - K / Middle Speed
5804 25 K Dev M L Development Motor - K / Low Speed
5804 26 K Dev M Card Black Development Motor - Thick paper
5804 27 FC Dev M H Color Development Motor - 185mm/s
5804 28 FC Dev M M Color Development Motor - 125mm/s
5804 29 FC Dev M L Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s
5804 30 TS CL [Y] Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow
5804 31 TS CL [M] Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta
5804 32 TS CL [C] Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan
5804 33 TS CL [K] Toner Supply Clutch for Black
5804 34 Valve SOL [K] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black
5804 35 Valve SOL [C] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan
5804 36 Valve SOL [M] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta
5804 37 Valve SOL [Y] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow
5804 38 Toner Sply Mt1 Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta
5804 39 Toner Sply Mt2 Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black
5804 40 Air Supply [Y] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow
5804 41 Air Supply [M] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta
5804 42 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan
5804 43 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black
5804 44 T End Sens [Y] Toner End Sensor - Y
SM 5-139 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
5804 Description
5804 45 T End Sens [M] Toner End Sensor - M
5804 46 T End Sens [C] Toner End Sensor - C
5804 47 T End Sens [K] Toner End Sensor - K
5804 50 PSU Fan PSU Cooling Fan Motor
5804 51 Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed
5804 52 Fusing Fan L Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed
5804 53 M Fan Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan
5804 54 Belt M CW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise
5804 55 Belt M CCW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise
5804 56 Belt M Break Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break
5804 57 Fusing Relay Fusing Relay
5804 58 Heat Lamp Heating Roller Fusing Lamp
5804 59 Pressure Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
5804 65 Drum M L CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise
5804 66 Drum M M CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /
Clockwise
5804 67 Drum M H CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise
5804 76 PF M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
5804 77 PF M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
5804 78 PF M H CW Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise
5804 79 PF M Feed Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise
5804 80 By-Pass M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
5804 81 By-Pass M C CW Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /
Clockwise
5804 82 By-Pass M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
5804 89 CH DC [Y] Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s
5804 90 CH DC [M] Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s
5804 91 CH DC [C] Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s
5804 92 CH DC [K] Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s
5804 93 CH AC [FC] 62.5 Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s
5804 94 CH AC [K] 62.5 Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s
5804 95 CH AC [FC] 125 Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s
5804 96 CH AC [K] 125 Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s
5804 97 CH AC [FC] 185 Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s
5804 98 CH AC [K] 185 Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s
5804 99 Dev DC [Y] Development DC Bias for Yellow
5804 100 Dev DC [M] Development DC Bias for Magenta
5804 101 Dev DC [C] Development DC Bias for Cyan
5804 102 Dev DC [K] Development DC Bias for Black
5804 103 Dev AC [FC] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s
5804 104 Dev AC [K] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s
5804 105 Dev AC [FC] 125 Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s
5804 106 Dev AC [K] 125 Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s
5804 107 Dev AC [FC] 185 Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s
5804 108 Dev AC [K] 185 Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s
5804 109 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow
5804 110 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta
5804 111 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan
B202/B178/B180 5-140 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
5804 Description
5804 112 Transfer [K] Transfer Current for Black
5804 113 Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias
5804 114 PA Roller Bias+ Paper Attraction Roller Bias
5804 115 PA Roller Bias- Paper Attraction Roller Bias
5804 116 DevAC TRG [FC] Development AC Trigger for Color
5804 117 DevAC TRG [K] Development AC Trigger for Black
5804 118 DevPWM TRG [K] Development PWM Trigger for Black
5804 119 DevPWM TRG [C] Development PWM Trigger for Cyan
5804 120 DevPWM TRG [M] Development PWM Trigger for Magenta
5804 121 DevPWM TRG [Y] Development PWM Trigger for Yellow
5804 122 CHdcPWM TRG [K] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black
5804 123 CHdcPWM TRG [C] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan
5804 124 CHdcPWM TRG [M] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta
5804 125 CHdcPWM TRG [Y] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow
5804 126 CHac1 TRG [FC] Charge AC1 Trigger for Color
5804 127 Chac2 TRG [FC] Charge AC2 Trigger for Color
5804 128 Chac3 TRG [FC] Charge AC3 Trigger for Color
5804 129 CHac1 TRG [K] Charge AC1 Trigger for Black
5804 130 Chac2 TRG [K] Charge AC2 Trigger for Black
5804 131 Chac3 TRG [K] Charge AC3 Trigger for Black
5804 132 ID Sensor LED ID Sensor LED
5804 133 TD Vcnt TD Sensor / Vcnt
5804 134 Memory Chip Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply
5804 136 PCU Cln Bias K PCU Cleaning Bias Black
5804 137 PCU Cln Bias YMC PCU Cleaning Bias YMC
5804 141 Polygon M 29 Polygon Motor / 29.528
Service
5804 142 Polygon M 21 Polygon Motor / 21.850
Tables
5804 143 LD FC[K]62.5 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 144 LD FC[K]125 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125
5804 145 LD FC[Y]62.5 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 146 LD FC[Y]125 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125
5804 147 LD FC[M]62.5 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 148 LD FC[M]125 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125
5804 149 LD FC[C]62.5 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5
5804 150 LD FC[C]125 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125
5804 151 LD1 [K] 62.5 LD1 Power for Black / 62.5
5804 152 LD1 [K] 125 LD1 Power for Black / 125
5804 153 LD1 [K] 185 LD1 Power for Black / 185
5804 154 LD2 [K] 62.5 LD2 Power for Black / 62.5
5804 155 LD2 [K] 125 LD2 Power for Black / 125
5804 156 LD2 [K] 185 LD2 Power for Black / 185
5804 157 LD [K]62.5 LD Power for Black / 62.5
5804 158 LD [K]125 LD Power for Black / 125
5804 159 LD [K]185 LD Power for Black / 185
5804 165 PSU M Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /
Motor
5804 166 PF CL PFU (1) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1
5804 167 PF CL PFU (2) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2
SM 5-141 B202/B178/B180
COPY SERVICE MODE
5804 Description
5804 168 Pick-up SOL PSU Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:
Paper Supply Unit)
5804 170 MB M 4-bin Mailbox Main Motor
5804 171 MB SOL1 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 1
5804 172 MB SOL2 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 2
5804 173 MB SOL3 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 3
5804 174 MB Gate SOL 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 176 Duplex SOL Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
5804 177 DI M1 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 81 / Counterclockwise
5804 178 DI M1 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 125 / Counterclockwise
5804 179 DI M1 162CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 162 / Counterclockwise
5804 180 DI M1 222CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 222 / Counterclockwise
5804 181 DI M1 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Counterclockwise
5804 182 DI M1 450CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Counterclockwise
5804 187 DI M1 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise
5804 188 DI M1 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Clockwise
5804 189 DI M1 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 560 / Clockwise
5804 190 DI M2 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 81 / Counterclockwise
5804 191 DI M2 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 125 / Counterclockwise
5804 192 DI M2 162CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 162 / Counterclockwise
5804 193 DI M2 222CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 222 / Counterclockwise
5804 194 DI M2 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Counterclockwise
5804 195 DI M2 450CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 450 / Counterclockwise
5804 200 DI M2 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Clockwise
5804 201 DI M2 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 450 / Clockwise
5804 202 DI M2 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 560 / Clockwise
5804 203 DI M12 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 81 / Counterclockwise
5804 204 DI M12 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 125 / Counterclockwise
5804 205 DI M12 162CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 162 / Counterclockwise
5804 206 DI M12 222CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 222 / Counterclockwise
5804 207 DI M12 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 370 / Counterclockwise
5804 208 DI M12 450CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 450 / Counterclockwise
5804 213 DI M12 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 370 / Clockwise
5804 214 DI M12 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 450 / Clockwise
5804 215 DI M12 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 560 / Clockwise
5804 216 PF M 81 Paper Feed Motor 81
5804 217 PF M 125 Paper Feed Motor 125
5804 218 PF M 162 Paper Feed Motor 162
5804 219 PF M 222 Paper Feed Motor 222
5804 220 PF M 230 Paper Feed Motor 230
5804 221 PF M 275 Paper Feed Motor 275
5804 222 PF M 370 Paper Feed Motor 370
5804 223 PF M 450 Paper Feed Motor 450
5804 224 DI M2 OFF Duplex Inverter Motor 2 Off
5804 225 ALL OFF All Off
B202/B178/B180 5-142 SM
COPY SERVICE MODE
Service
Tables
paper size.
Tray
B178S913.WMF
SM 5-143 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-144 SM
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
Service
setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the data
Tables
currently stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory storage
location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
SM 5-145 B202/B178/B180
SCANNER SP MODE
B202/B178/B180 5-146 SM
REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
Service
Tables
B178S914.JPG
3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the
system settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
SM 5-147 B202/B178/B180
REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
B178S914.JPG
3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset
the Copier Document Server settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
B202/B178/B180 5-148 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Location of
Type of firmware Function Message shown
firmware
Engine - Main Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine
Engine - Music Line position adjustment BCU MUSIC CPU Music
Operating system Flash ROM on the Onboard System
System
controller board
Feature application Printer/scanner Network DocBox
Netfile Application
SD card
Feature application Printer/scanner Onboard Printer
Printer Application
SD card
Feature application Printer/scanner Onboard Scn
Scanner Application
SD card
Feature application Flash ROM on the Opt DIMM Fax
Fax Application
controller board
Network Interface Printer/scanner Network Support
NIB
SD card
Scanner IPU Scanner control IPU Flash ROM Scanner IPU
Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel Op Panel. XX
Service
Tables
Fax FCU Fax control FCU Jupi FCU (XXX)-1
Language firmware Operation Panel LANG.1
Language Two languages can be LANG.2
(16 languages) selected from 16
languages.
Document server Printer/scanner Web Document Box
WebDocBox
application SD card
Web Service application Printer/scanner Web Support
WebSys
SD card
Page description language PS3 SD card Option PS3
PS3
(PostScript3)
SG3-PRE1 Optional G3 fax control FCU SG3DREI-1
SM 5-149 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE
B202/B178/B180 5-150 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Service
Tables
5. Disconnect the network cable from the
copier if the machine is connected to a [B]
B178S501.WMF
network.
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version
update screen appears on the LCD in English.
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the
operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
SM 5-151 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE
NOTE: The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you
touch “OpPanel”. The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals
when the LCDC firmware is updating. The power key flashes on and off at
3 s intervals when the update is finished.
9. The "Update Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing
the updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been
updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the “Update Done”
message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number. The example above
shows error “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.
(
5.6.7)
B202/B178/B180 5-152 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
B178S922.WMF
Service
Tables
firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.
SM 5-153 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE
B202/B178/B180 5-154 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
B178S502.JPG
Service
Tables
B178S503.JPG
3. Press the “Exit” button. Then turn the copier off and on again.
SM 5-155 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE
B202/B178/B180 5-156 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
S elect Lang.
N ow Lang.
LANG. 1(1) Japanese 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
------ ---------------
LANG. 2(2) English - U K 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
---------------
------
Service
Tables
Exit(0)
B178S930.WMF
SM 5-157 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE
6. Touch “LANG 1(1)” to select the 1st Language. Touch “LANG (2)” to select the
2nd Language.
(9)
Exit(0)
B178S931.WMF
7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-
keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.
Touching “Exit (0)” returns you to the previous screen.
8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch “↑(7)” or “↓(9)” on
the screen (or press or ) to show more choices.
B202/B178/B180 5-158 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
S elect Lang.
N ow Lang.
LANG. 1(1) Japanese 2.87 -> Italian 2.88
------ ---------------
LANG. 2(2) English - U K 2.87 -> ------------ ---------------
---------------
------
Exit(0) UpDate(#)
B178S932.WMF
Service
Tables
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
• The operation panel switches off.
• The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch
off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
SM 5-159 B202/B178/B180
FIRMWARE UPDATE Rev. 12/2005
⇒
failed card and tray again, or replace controller board.
Write Protect switch on SD Card is set ON.
Electronic confirmation check SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
50 failed card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.
B202/B178/B180 5-160 SM
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Use high caution when you do the AD Card Appli Move procedure:
1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application
program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to
use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to
another card.
2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.
Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from
Service
Tables
one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the
application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the
future.
4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other
data to the same SD card that stores PostScript data.
SM 5-161 B202/B178/B180
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
B202/B178/B180 5-162 SM
Rev. 11/2005 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Service
Tables
SM 5-163 B202/B178/B180
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
Power ON A
Error Logged
Interrupt Check NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
B178S933.WMF
B202/B178/B180 5-164 SM
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
No. Name
G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector
You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel. Then you will see the results of
the test.
The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnostic
report after completing the test.
• Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. You can check the
errors detected during self-diagnostics with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
• Refer to section 4.3 for details about the error codes.
Service
Tables
SM 5-165 B202/B178/B180
USING THE DEBUG LOG
B178S001.JPG
3. On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
B202/B178/B180 5-166 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under
“5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel
key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press .
B178S002.JPG
Service
Tables
B178S003.JPG
B178S004.JPG
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. “Troubleshooting”.
SM 5-167 B202/B178/B180
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch “5859”.
Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.
B178S005.JPG
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource
Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box
(Document Server)
B202/B178/B180 5-168 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
Service
Tables
representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you
want.
SM 5-169 B202/B178/B180
USING THE DEBUG LOG
1. Press (Clear Modes). on the operation panel when the error occurs.
2. On the control panel, enter “01”. Then hold down for at least 3 seconds
until the machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the
hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
B202/B178/B180 5-170 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Service
Tables
delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.
SM 5-171 B202/B178/B180
DIP SWITCHES Rev. 10/2005
BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU and connect the connector as listed in the table.
⇒ Model
1 2
DIP Switch
3 4
Connector
⇒One of the following errors occur when the DIP switch is incorrectly set:
• SC195
• SC902
• SC995
• Fusing Unit Setting Error
• Toner Cartridge Setting Error
B202/B178/B180 5-172 SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
OVERVIEW
23 11
12
22
K
21 13
Y
14
20 C
M 15
19
16
18
17
Descriptions
Detailed
B178D501.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor 15. Transfer unit
2. ADF exposure glass 16. Rotation encoder
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 17. Tray 2
4. Scanner lamp 18. Tray 1
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 19. Waste toner bottle
6. Original width sensor 20. Waste toner vibrator
7. Original length sensor
21. Duplex feed unit
8. Scanner motor
9. Exposure glass
22. Transfer belt cleaning unit
10. Sensor board unit (SBU) 23. ID sensor
11. Toner cartridge 24. Development unit (each color)
12. Laser optics housing unit 25. PCU (each color)
13. Polygon mirror motor 26. Fusing unit
14. By-pass feed table
SM 6-1 B202/B178/B180
OVERVIEW
12
11
10
9
K
8 Y
C
3
7
M
B178D502.WMF
1. Original tray 7. Duplex inverter unit
2. Original exit tray 8. Duplex feed unit
3. By-pass tray 9. To optional finisher
4. Tray 1 10. To optional finisher
5. Tray 2 11. External Tray
6. Optional paper feed unit/LCT 12. Standard tray
The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplex
inverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feed
unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. When
the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray
finisher from the lower exit.
B202/B178/B180 6-2 SM
OVERVIEW
3 7
4 9
B178D503.WMF
Descriptions
motor-K: exit section. Detailed
3. Development drive Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), the
motor-CMY: registration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.
4. Drum drive motor-CMY: Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
5. Transfer belt contact Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.
motor:
6. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).
7. Drum drive motor-K: Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.
8. Transfer unit drive Drives the transfer unit.
motor:
9. Waste toner vibration Makes vibrations to not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.
motor:
SM 6-3 B202/B178/B180
OVERVIEW
LD LDB
I2C CN
Drive PCB:
Scanner Unit PCB: Operation
SIO Panel
Motors DRB
Xenon Lamp
Transfer Roller LCDC
Voltage Scanner Motor
Voltage Main
Paper Attractio HPS PCB:SBU transpare SW
Voltage
APS CCD
Transfer Voltage 24V
Base
Charge Voltage
Engine
Development Voltage Control HDD
Unit
ID sensor
Motors
Sensors
Paper
Feed Unit CN
Duplex
CN
Unit Breaker SW
Fusing Relay Supply Unit
B178D504A.WMF
B202/B178/B180 6-4 SM
OVERVIEW
Descriptions
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):
The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,
MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:
Main CPU
• Engine sequence
• Engine operation
• Timing for peripherals
• High voltage supply, laser, and fusing
• Sensors, drive board, and solenoids
• Motors
MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU
• TD sensor
• Line position adjustment
• Memory chip on the toner cartridge
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
• Line position adjustment
Controller:
The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles the
following functions:
• Machine-to-host interface
• Operation panel interface
• Network interface
• Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM
LD Drive Board:
This is the laser diode drive circuit board.
DRB:
Descriptions
The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors Detailed
(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), and transfer unit drive motor.
IPU:
The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes
digital signals.
SBU:
The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-to-
digital conversion circuit.
Operation Panel Board:
Controls the display panel, the LED and the keypad.
Motherboard:
The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,
controller and IPU.
SM 6-5 B202/B178/B180
OVERVIEW
FCU:
The FCU (fax controller unit) controls the fax programs and communicates with the
controller to share copier resources.
Scanner I/O Board:
The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,
and electricity.
2, 6
1
5
3
8
10 K
4
Y
9
C
B178D505.WMF
This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for
color printing. Each PCU has a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and blade.
From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.
A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs. Then the toner image on each drum is
transferred to the paper.
The paper path is inclined at about 38 degrees. This helps to keep the machine as
compact as possible.
B202/B178/B180 6-6 SM
OVERVIEW
1. Drum charge:
The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge
2. Laser exposure:
The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors
and reaches the drum. The machine turns the laser beam on and off to make a
latent image on the drum.
3. Development:
The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on
the drum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (one
for each color).
4. Image transfer:
The charge given to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to the
paper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.
5. Cleaning for OPC drum:
The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.
6. Quenching for OPC drum:
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at
the end of every job.
7. Paper attraction:
Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge given to the paper attraction
roller.
8. Separation:
Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.
9. Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt:
The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller
inside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.
10. ID sensor:
Descriptions
The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). The ID Detailed
sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The ID
sensor output is used for the following:
• Process control and for automatic line position
• Skew
• Color registration adjustments for the latent image.
SM 6-7 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL
B202/B178/B180 6-8 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Descriptions
You can adjust M with SP3-906-4. You can adjust N with SP3-906-3. Detailed
SM 6-9 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL
Start
End
B178D608.WMF
B202/B178/B180 6-10 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B178D506.WMF
First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until the
fluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.
Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns (see the diagram).
This 5-grade pattern is made in black, yellow, cyan, and magenta (20 squares in
total). They are made by changing the development bias and charge roller voltage.
The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always the
same.
Descriptions
Finally, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same order
Detailed
as the first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are not the
same as those of the first series.
SM 6-11 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL
M/A
B Development Bias
B178D507.WMF
The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the
transfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. Then the
machine selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A
for each color by referring to a table in memory.
Laser power (VL) selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.
• If it is set to "Fixed", the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.
• If it is set to "Process Control", LD power is selected using the same memory
table as mentioned above.
• If it is set to "LD power", LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern
generation (steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).
The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that the
development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-
120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt-cleaning
unit.
Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL (as a result of process control):
This depends on the process control type as follows.
• Forced: No limit
• Initial: After Developer Initialization: ± 80 volts
• Interval: (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts
• Interval: (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)
Steps 6 to 8 are done only if SP3-125-2 is set to "LD Power". (Default: Steps 6
to 8 are not used)
B202/B178/B180 6-12 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B178D508.WMF
The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.
The pattern has 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and is a dot-
pattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). They are
made using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the types
mentioned above. The various grades are made by changing the LD power.
Descriptions
Detailed
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection
The machine determines the relationship M/A
between the amount of toner on the transfer
belt and the laser power for each of the 10
grades. Then the machine selects the laser
power to get the target M/A. Target
M/A
L LD Power
B178D509.WMF
SM 6-13 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL
[A]
[B]
Left
Transfer belt
B178D510.WMF
Highlight Pattern
The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.
To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt at
the following times during each print job.
Job Interval Color of highlight pattern
Black-and-white printing After every four pages Black
Color printing After every one page One of four colors
Adjustment Process
The machine generates a highlight pattern (one grade) of a specified density. The
center ID sensor checks the density. Then the machine adjusts VREF by comparing
the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). The machine adjusts
VCNT when this adjustment is not sufficient.
B202/B178/B180 6-14 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in the
development unit. At the same time, it accommodates changes in the development
conditions through the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and
the number of prints made are also used in the calculation.
The amount of toner supplied is determined by the ‘on’ time of the toner supply
clutch. The total ‘on’ time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chip
for the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on the
process line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amount
of toner for each color.
Descriptions
3. Fixed supply mode Detailed
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. You can adjust the
amount of toner supply with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect
(the default setting is 5%).
SM 6-15 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
B178D511.WMF
Introduction
Toner End
To determine the toner end status, the controller considers the following
information:
• TD sensor [A] in the development unit
• Pixel counter
B202/B178/B180 6-16 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
Descriptions
checks the signals from the toner end sensor. Detailed
NOTE: You can adjust the weight with SP2-212-1 and -2.
a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level
(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that the
machine is in the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost
empty,” “Replace Toner Cartridge(s)”, and “Xxxxx,” show. “Xxxxx”
indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,
the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.
The machine resumes its normal operation.
SM 6-17 B202/B178/B180
PROCESS CONTROL
B202/B178/B180 6-18 SM
PROCESS CONTROL
[A]
B178D512.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-19 B202/B178/B180
SCANNING
6.3 SCANNING
6.3.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 9
B178D513.WMF
The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the light
emitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor
board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCD
analog signals into digital signals.
When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motor
pulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scanned
from left to right as shown above.
When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported
onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stay
on the glass; but goes to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home
positions.
B202/B178/B180 6-20 SM
SCANNING
[A] [E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B178D514.WMF
The scanner motor [B] drives the 1st scanner [A] and the 2nd scanner [E] through
the scanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].
Book mode -
The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half
that of the 1st scanner.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner motor speed. In the main scan direction it is done by image
processing on the IPU board.
Descriptions
Detailed
You can adjust the magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the scanner
motor speed with SP4-008.
ARDF mode -
The scanners always stay in their home position (the scanner HP sensor detects
the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the original through
the ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-
scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification in the
main scan direction is done in the IPU board. This is the same as for book mode.
You can adjust magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the ARDF
motor speed with SP6-017.
SM 6-21 B202/B178/B180
SCANNING
[A]
[B]
B178D515.WMF
• The original width sensors [A] detect the original width. The original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
• The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the
platen cover sensor is activated as it is closed. It detects the original size by the
on/off signals it gets from each sensor.
• If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on the
SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is
pressed.
L1 L2 L3
W1
W2
B178D516.WMF
B202/B178/B180 6-22 SM
SCANNING
Width
Original Size Length Sensor
Sensor SP4-301
Metric display
Inch version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132
B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141
F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165
A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133
B5-L X X O X X 142
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5
B5-S X X X X O 14
A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128
For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” shows on the operation
panel.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine’s productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the copy paper is
lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-pass tray,
the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area. Information from the
original size sensors is disregarded.
Refer to the ARDF manual for more information on original size detection with the
ARDF.
Descriptions
Detailed
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anti-
condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors. Condensation can
occur when the scanner unit is moved from a cold room to a warm room, for
example. Condensation can cause abnormal images.
SM 6-23 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
CCD SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
M
Controller BCU
C
Y
Memory
K
B178D517.WMF
Memory
• The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. K
• The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital
signals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).
• The IPU processes the image. Then the image data goes to the controller.
B202/B178/B180 6-24 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
O R(B)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit R 10 bit Field 8 bit
E A/D Converter Memory
O G
Analog Amplifier 10 bit SBU G 10 bit Field 8 bit
CCD E ASIC
A/D Converter Controller Memory
O B(R)
Analog Amplifier 10 bit B 10 bit 8 bit
E A/D Converter
SBU IPU
B178D518.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
• Operational amplifiers amplify odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals
from the CCD.
2. Signal Composition
• The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) are
combined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.
A/D Conversion
• The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digital
signals.
Descriptions
White Level Correction Detailed
A white plate is on the back of the left scale. The scanner scans this plate to see
the actual white level when you turn the switch on. To compensate the difference
between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white level), the
CCD-gain control is conducted.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned with
the ARDF.
SM 6-25 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
Adjustments
The properties of the scanner unit, (necessary for controlling the scanner VPU
(video processing unit)), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.
Adjust the following after you replace the SBU:
SP4–008 Scanner sub-scan magnification
SP4–010 Scanner leading edge registration
SP4–011 Scanner side-to-side registration
B202/B178/B180 6-26 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
SBU
• Shading Correction
• Picture Elemnet Correction
• Color Correction
• Scanner γ Correction
• Main Scan Magnification
• Filter
• ADS ASIC1
I/F
Controller
PCI BUS
ASIC3
BCU
ASIC2
• Gradation Processing
ASIC4
IPU
Controller
FCU
Option
B178D519.WMF
Shading Correction
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the
edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or, variations
Descriptions
Detailed
among pixels of the CCD.
SM 6-27 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Separation
The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
• Used to locate text and line diagrams
• Locates areas of strong contrast.
• Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
• Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
• Only uses data from the green CCD.
B202/B178/B180 6-28 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
255
Signal Level
Color first
B178D520.WMF
B178D609.WMF
The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copy
mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGB
video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals is
within a certain range, the original is considered black and white.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-29 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
255 255
0 1023 0
255
Dark Light Dark Light
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
B178D610.WMF
B178D521.WMF
The RGB video signals from the CCD go to the IPU section. This signal is
proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit converts
the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.
• The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.
• This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is done
later in the image process).
• The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.
B202/B178/B180 6-30 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filtering
Necessary software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.
• Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode).
• RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas
• Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-31 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
• Simple color copying.
• No special modes applied.
• To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
B202/B178/B180 6-32 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-33 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
Example: Y
K
High
Output ID
Low
Low Input Signal High
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B178D611.WMF
B178D522.WMF
The gamma curves for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black should be identical, as
shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical components can result
in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
• Printer characteristics are much more variable than scanner ones. Printer
gamma needs recalibration and adjustment from time to time.
• The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
• ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
• After ACC, you can adjust the gamma curve for each color with service program
(SP4-918).
• 4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
• You can get back the previous gamma curve if it was better.
• You can load factory settings with SP 5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
• Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings with SP5-610-
5.
B202/B178/B180 6-34 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3. High
ID MAX
OFFSET
Output ID
Low
Fig. 3
B178D523.WMF
0
Low
Fig. 4
B178D524.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
0
Low
Fig. 5 B178D525.WMF
6).
0
Low
Fig. 6
B178D526.WMF
SM 6-35 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE PROCESSING
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
B202/B178/B180 6-36 SM
IMAGE DATA PATH
CCD SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
M
Controller BCU
C
Y
Memory
K
B178D517.WMF
Copier Application
SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory) → IPU → Controller (straight through) →
BCU
Descriptions
Detailed
Printer Application
Controller → IPU (through) → Controller → BCU
SM 6-37 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE
15 5
6
14 8
13
12
11
9
10 B178D529.WMF
This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent
images on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).
There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is only
done for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams is
used).
Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum.
However, for yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is
because the units for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror
from the units for yellow and black.
B202/B178/B180 6-38 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
[B]
[C]
[E]
B178D530.WMF
The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of the
polygon mirror [B]. Laser beams for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to the
lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect the
laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.
The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line. Without this component, the line bends
out towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjusted
in the factory.
The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode and model (see
below).
Descriptions
Detailed
Resolution Polygon motor Process line Print speed
Mode Remarks
(dpi) speed (rpm) speed (mm/s) (ppm)
C2a: 38,268 C2a: 162 C2a: 35
600 x 600
B/W C2b: 26,221 C2b: 222 C2b: 45
1,800 x 600
(except C2k: 38,268 C2k: 162 C2k: 28 Dual beam
OHP/Thick C2a: 29,528 C2a: 125 C2a: 28 writing
paper) 1,200 x 1,200 C2b: 38,268 C2b: 162 C2b: 35
C2k: 29,528 C2k: 125 C2k: 24
Color C2a: 29,528 C2a: 125 C2a: 28
600 x 600
(except C2b: 38,268 C2b: 162 C2b: 35
1,800 x 600
OHP/Thick C2k: 29,528 C2k: 125 C2k: 24
paper) 1,200 x 1,200 38,268 81 17
600 x 600
OHP/Thick 1,800 x 600 38,268 81 17
1,200 x 1,200
SM 6-39 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE
[B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
B178D531.WMF
Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD). There is one at
each corner of the laser optics-housing unit.
Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color from
the time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magenta
and cyan. The two LSDs at the left [B] are used for yellow and black.
B202/B178/B180 6-40 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
[E]
[A]
[B]
1
2
3
B178D532.WMF
[C] [D]
B178D612.WMF
There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E]. There is a positioning
motor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, while the motor
pushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to one of the
following three positions:
• 600-dpi position []
• 1,200-dpi position []
Descriptions
• Home position [] Detailed
Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unit
is set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goes
as follows:
• 600-dpi position → Home position → 1,200-dpi position
• 1,200-dpi position → Home position → 600-dpi position
The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is in
its home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpi
positions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance is
calculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.
SM 6-41 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE
The table shows the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.
Mode Position
600 dpi 600-dpi position
Monochrome
1,200 dpi 1,200-dpi position
600 dpi 600-dpi position
Color
1,200 dpi 600-dpi position
You must adjust the beam pitch for 600 dpi and 1,200 dpi with SP2-109-2 -3 after
you replace the laser optics-housing unit.
B202/B178/B180 6-42 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
24 Front C over
V and U pper
Left C over 5
R ight C over SW V
LD 5 LD 5
SW V V LD 5V
R ELA 1.8V
Y R EG 3.3V
24V S 5V 1.8V 3.3V 5V L P
1.8V LD O F PM AC A D D
5V R EG 3.3 F
PSU 3.3V V
G AVD LD
PD
24V 3.3V
24V 5V
LD B (M )
GND BCU LD 5
V
3.3V 5V L
D P
1.8V LD O F PM AC A D
G AVD F
24V LD
P olygon PD
M otor GN
D
LD B (K )
B178D533.WMF
Two safety switches are used to turn the relay off. One switch is used for the front
Descriptions
cover and upper left cover. This safety switch is off when either of the two covers is Detailed
opened. The other safety switch is used for the right door.
• PMAC: Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC on
C-MOS technology
• LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)
B178D500.WMF
SM 6-43 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE
Error Messages
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B178D534.WMF
Along with other switches, the LD safety switches help show error messages
related to external covers. When one or more covers are open, the messages,
“Cover is open as shown” and “Close it,” show with a diagram. The diagram shows
which cover is open. The table lists the diagram indications and the switch
conditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedence over others.
Condition
Diagram indication [A] Upper left [B] Duplex unit [C] Front door [E] Right door
cover switch switch switch switch
Upper left cover Open (any) (any) (any)
Duplex unit (any) Open (any) (any)
Front cover Closed (any) Open (any)
Right door Closed (any) Closed Open
NOTE: 1) In the table, “any” indicates that the condition does not affect the
diagram indication.
2) The left door switch [D] stays closed when the upper left cover switch
[A] is closed.
B202/B178/B180 6-44 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
Y
YY KY YY KY YY KY
K
KK KC KK KC KK KC
C
CC KM CC KM CC KM
M
MM MM MM
Y
K
C
M
B178D535.WMF
During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eight
times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,
KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takes
the average of the spaces. Then it adjusts the following positions and
magnification:
Descriptions
• Sub scan line position for YCM Detailed
• Main scan line position for YCM
• Magnification ratio for KYCM
• Skew for YCM
The transfer belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are
measured. SC285 shows if an error is detected four times consecutively.
SM 6-45 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE
B202/B178/B180 6-46 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. However,
the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. The table
below shows the conditions and the processes you need to do. Note that the
adjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and
magnification are done under the same conditions.
The numbers in the mode selection column show the setting of SP 5-993-001. For
details, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.
Mode S-pos./
selectio Condition Setting M-pos./ Skew
n Magni.
Job End SP3-906-001
Interrupt SP3-906-002
Process Non-use Time 1, 2 SP3-906-003, 004
1
control Recovery (fusing
temperature 60°C or None
lower)
Standby SP5-993-003, 005
Temperature
Job start SP5-993-003, 006
difference
Interrupt SP5-993-003, 04, 022
1 or 2 Main scan length detection SP2-919-001 *
Initialization (fusing temperature over
SP5-993-026
60°C)
Replacement of development unit or
None
PCU
0, 1, or 2 Forced self check SP5-993-002
Descriptions
2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit. Detailed
Other temperatures are measured by the sensors on the laser optics-
housing unit.
3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the six frequency levels of
the line position adjustment.
SM 6-47 B202/B178/B180
LASER EXPOSURE
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B178D536.WMF
The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjust
the angle of the 3rd mirrors [D] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position for
black. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.
B202/B178/B180 6-48 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
1
7 2
6
B178D537.WMF
Descriptions
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU has the Detailed
following:
1) OPC drum
2) Non-contact charge roller
3) Cleaning brush
4) Cleaning blade.
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust
this in the field.
SM 6-49 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
M
B178D538.WMF
The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.
The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.
Both motors are brush-less DC motors. This helps to reduce the drive noise. The
brush-less DC motors make sound that is not the same as other machines, but this
sound does not mean machine defective.
B202/B178/B180 6-50 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B178D539.WMF
Mechanism
The machine uses these sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate. SC440 shows
Descriptions
when it detects that the drum motor is not moving. These sensors also help the
Detailed
machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when the main switch is
turned on, and during initializing. This prevents phase fluctuation between
printouts.
There is an interrupter [E] on each of the black [D] and yellow [C] drum gears. The
drum gear position sensors [F][G] detect the positions of these interrupters
respectively. The sensors check that the two interrupters are parallel. This
mechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary. The cyan [B] and
magenta [A] drum gears operate with the yellow drum gear because these three
drum gears are linked through other gears [H][I].
In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not in
a parallel position (shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position of the
black drum gear.
The relative positions of the gears are adjusted every 30 jobs.
SM 6-51 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
NOTE: No error occurs in step 1 and step 2 if the connector of the black drum
position sensor has been connected to the yellow drum position sensor
(and the connector of the yellow drum position sensor, to the black drum
position sensor).
B202/B178/B180 6-52 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
[B]
[A]
B178D540.WMF
This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The non-
contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltage
supply board – C.B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc and
ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure that
the charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.
The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process
control is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "ON"). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "OFF"), the dc voltage is the value stored
in SP2-001-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap
between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 µm.
The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans the
Descriptions
charge roller. Detailed
The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known as
NOx). These gases can stay on the surface of the drum. This can cause unfocused
copies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at the following times:
• Power on
• At the end of a job (if more than 200 prints)
• When a toner cartridge has been replaced
SP3-920-1 to -4 determines when this procedure (known as “refresh mode”) is
done. You can do this at any time with SP3-920-5 if the prints are smeared.
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.
SM 6-53 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B178D541.WMF
The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner that stays on the drum. Then
the cleaning blade [B] scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports the
toner towards the waste toner collection duct.
The lubricant bar [D] is on the cleaning brush. The cleaning brush rubs against the
lubricant bar and lubricates the drum surface. Excess lubricant is removed by the
cleaning blade. Then it goes to the waste toner collection duct.
B202/B178/B180 6-54 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
[F]
[G]
[E] [J]
[H]
[M]
[K]
[I]
[B] [L]
[A] [D]
[C] B178D542.WMF
Descriptions
waste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motor- Detailed
CMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black → [F], yellow → [G],
cyan → [H], magenta → [I].
The waste toner from the transfer belt-cleaning unit drops into the waste toner
collection duct from another opening [E].
The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There are
three openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner drops
into the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drive
motor-K.
SM 6-55 B202/B178/B180
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
The table shows the conditions under which the motor operates.
Case 1: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second
job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at the end of the
second job (see ).
Case 2: The copier does one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the
motor operates at the following times:
• One time during the fifth printing
• One time during the tenth printing
• One time at the job end (see ).
Case 3: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second
job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates at the following times:
• One time during the fifth printing of the second job
• One time during the tenth printing of the second job
• One time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfy
condition ).
B202/B178/B180 6-56 SM
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
[A]
[B]
B178D543.WMF
The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the
machine.
The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs the
machine when it is almost full.
When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor is
deactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full and
shows “Waste Toner is Almost Full”.
Descriptions
Detailed
At this time, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500
sheets, it shows “Replace Waste Toner,” at the end of the job. After this, you
cannot use the machine again until the bottle is replaced or emptied.
NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper size
is A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.
SM 6-57 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT
6.8 DEVELOPMENT
6.8.1 OVERVIEW
3
6
4
B178D544.WMF
5
This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 300 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust this in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18.2 mm (circumference about 57.2 mm).
B202/B178/B180 6-58 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.2 DRIVE
[A]
[C]
B178D545.WMF
[B]
[C]
B178D546.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black through
gears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.
The gear trains are shown in the diagram by dotted lines.
The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,
cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives the
registration roller.
The drive gears [C] of the development units are flexible. This creates a smooth
connection between the development motor gear and the drive gear of the
development unit.
SM 6-59 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT
[C]
[A] B178D547.WMF
[B]
Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward to
agitate the developer.
This happens at the following times:
• During process control self check
• During toner supply
• During development.
Ducts on the top of the developer hopper [C] make sure that the internal pressure
does not become too high. These ducts are sealed to not let the toner solidify.
This development unit does not operate very well at high temperatures (over 50°
C). The toner inside the development unit can become solid at temperatures higher
that this value. A developer initialization error shows if the toner does become solid.
At this time, you must do the following procedure:
NOTE: You should also do this procedure when you install a new development
unit.
1. Remove the (old) development unit.
2. Keep the (new) development unit level and shake it several times from side to
side.
3. Install it to the machine.
B202/B178/B180 6-60 SM
DEVELOPMENT
[B]
[A]
B178D548.WMF
The sub PSU [A] supplies development bias to the development roller via the
receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.
There is a dc bias voltage.
Descriptions
The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is Detailed
enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "ON"). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "OFF"), the dc bias is the value stored in
SP2-201-001 to 009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
SM 6-61 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT
[C]
[B] [F]
[A]
[G]
[H]
B178D549.WMF
[I]
Overview
The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner is
transported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (each
cartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport fine
powder than previous methods.
B202/B178/B180 6-62 SM
DEVELOPMENT
[B]
[C]
[A] [D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B178D550.WMF
The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottom
of the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe
[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe.
The inner pipe is longer than the outer pipe.
The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at the
Descriptions
bottom end of the pipe. The toner passes the sensor windows [G] on its way to the Detailed
toner tube. The windows are transparent and are at the front side and the rear side
of the pipe. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through this area
if there is no toner in the pipe.
The airflow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comes
out of the four openings at the top end.
SM 6-63 B202/B178/B180
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Transport
[B]
[C] [D]
[E]
[A]
B178D551.WMF
Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attraction
pump) [A], has the following components:
• Toner supply clutch [B]
• Rubber tube [C]
• Rotor [D]
The above components attract the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward the
development unit.
The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridge
and passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch turns on
and off as many times as necessary to supply the necessary amount of toner. The
amount of toner depends on the results of toner supply control.
Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.
B202/B178/B180 6-64 SM
DEVELOPMENT
Shutter Mechanism
[D] [C]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[A]
B178D552.WMF
The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.
The protrusion [A] on the development unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump when
the development unit is placed in the machine. At the same time, the protrusion [C]
on the pump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are
open, toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.
The shutter spring [E and F] pulls and closes the shutter when the development
unit is removed.
B178D553.WMF
SM 6-65 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
10
11
12
16 15 14 13 B178D554.WMF
There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100
sheets).
The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.
Tray 1 can hold A4 or letter paper only. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.
B202/B178/B180 6-66 SM
PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E] [D]
[H]
[K] [G]
[N]
[L]
[O]
[M] [P] B178D613.WMF
B178D555.WMF
The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray
2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G]. It uses clutches and complex trains of gears (the
locations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram) to
do this.
When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] are
always in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. However, the pick-up
roller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid [Q] turns
Descriptions
on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed [I][L][N], and Detailed
separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper feed clutch
stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.
SM 6-67 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
[H]
[A]
[B]
[I]
[D]
[C]
B178D556.WMF
The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2-paper size switches [B] detect when the paper
trays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray has
been placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]
on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray lift
arm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects
that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.
B202/B178/B180 6-68 SM
PAPER FEED
[D]
[F]
[A] [E]
[G]
[C]
[B]
B178D557.WMF
There is no size switch for tray 1. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT. You
can change this with SP1-902-1.
For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper size
as shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate
is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].
1: Pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 1 [D] 2 [E] 3 [F] 4 [G]
11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0
A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0
Descriptions
*1
81/2" x 14" SEF B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 1 Detailed
81/2" x 11" SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 0
11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1
A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1
NOTE:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected
(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
SM 6-69 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
[A] [C]
[B]
B178D558.WMF
Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper in
the tray.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves up
and the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [B] Paper height sensor 1 [C]
Full OFF OFF
Nearly full ON OFF
Near end ON ON
Almost empty OFF ON
OFF: No actuator
B202/B178/B180 6-70 SM
PAPER FEED
6.9.7 REGISTRATION
[A]
[B]
B178D559.WMF
The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] with a
clutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated by
dotted lines in the above diagram).
The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.
You can adjust the paper buckle with SP1-003-1 to -8.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-71 B202/B178/B180
PAPER FEED
The machine changes the line speed if there is a page with color in the middle of
the job during a monochrome print job. However, it will not change the line speed if
there is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.
B202/B178/B180 6-72 SM
PAPER FEED
[B] [F]
[A]
[G]
B178D560.WMF
The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].
The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer
unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still not
reached the grip roller. Paper is handled by the transfer unit and the grip roller at
the same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew the paper.
Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shorter sizes.
From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easily affected
than mono-color images.
Descriptions
To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activated Detailed
under the following conditions:
1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.
2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.
3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.
The spring [A] always presses the grip roller against the transport roller [B]. When
the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on. Then the lever [C] pushes
the grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.
SM 6-73 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT
4
B178D561.WMF
• The second page (rear side) is printed first for duplex print jobs.
• To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)
inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (inside
the machine).
• The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.
• When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out
to the finisher.
• If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected to
receive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the second
side has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards to
the selected tray.
• Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).
B202/B178/B180 6-74 SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 3 1 4 2 3 4
[B]
B178D562.WMF
[A]
2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 1 3 2 4 3 4
[B]
Descriptions
B178D563.WMF
Detailed
SM 6-75 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B178D564.WMF
B202/B178/B180 6-76 SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[B]
[A]
B178D565.WMF
This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the external
tray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.
NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing is
selected.
The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray
Descriptions
at one of the following times: Detailed
• If thick paper or OHP mode is selected
• If the external tray is selected as the output tray with the operation panel or the
printer driver
SM 6-77 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
[C]
B178D566.WMF
[B] B178D567.WMF
This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 is
printed.
The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the second
side.
The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides are
printed.
B202/B178/B180 6-78 SM
DUPLEX UNIT
[B]
[D]
[A]
[D]
B178D568.WMF
[C]
B178D569.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.
[A]
Descriptions
[D] Detailed
[D] [E]
B178D570.WMF
[C] B178D571.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junction
mylar 3 [E]. Then the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the paper
out to the finisher.
SM 6-79 B202/B178/B180
DUPLEX UNIT
[A]
B178D572.WMF
The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.
[A]
B178D573.WMF
The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller
[A].
B202/B178/B180 6-80 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
12 1
2
11
10 4
9
8
5
B178D574.WMF
The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning blade
and brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste toner
bottle.
There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensor
detects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for process
control. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position
adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.
SM 6-81 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
[B]
[A]
B178D575.WMF
The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit via
the timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process
line speed.
B202/B178/B180 6-82 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
Rotation Encoder
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178D576.WMF
An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed of
the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder. Then it
adjusts the rotation speed of the transfer belt.
The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. These
notches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notches
that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually
large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller
ignores such unusual signals. Therefore, incorrect reading does not affect the
rotation speed.
Descriptions
Ignored
Detailed
Number of notches
(read by the sensor) Filter H
Filter L
Ignored
Time
B178D577.WMF
Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its highest possible value.
Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its lowest possible value.
SM 6-83 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
[A]
B178D575A.WMF
This control method is called "Dancing Control" in the SP5-995. You must execute
SP5-995-025 and -027 after replacing the transfer belt unit or transfer belt.
B202/B178/B180 6-84 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
[A]
[F] [B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B178D578.WMF
The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on the
transfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board supplies current to the transfer
roller and the paper attraction roller [C].
These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measured
by the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity
(measured by the humidity sensor).
Descriptions
The following adjustments are shown below: Detailed
• You can adjust the transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W,
resolution, paper type) with SP2-301-1 to -99. The by-pass tray settings are used
when the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex prints
manually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper with
SP2-309-5 to -11.
• You can adjust the current for paper attraction with SP2-801-1 to -37.
The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and the
belt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the toner
from being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.
The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.
SM 6-85 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
[F]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B178D579.WMF
[E]
The transfer belt-cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensor
patterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.
Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transfer
unit drive motor [A] drives the unit.
The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes waste
toner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off
the transfer belt. Then the toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards
the waste toner collection duct.
The scraper [F] does not let the waste toner stick to the cleaning brush.
B202/B178/B180 6-86 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B178D580.WMF
Mechanism
The transfer belt contact and release mechanism increases the lifetime of the
transfer belt and drums.
The drum for black always contacts the belt. However, the transfer belt moves
away from the other drums during monochrome printing.
In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transfer
belt moves away from the black drum when you turn the release lever
Descriptions
Detailed
counterclockwise.
When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous page
has gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on
and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that it
contacts the other three drums.
The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,
even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speed
reduces if the transfer belt changes position.
The belt moves away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any error
except a power failure.
NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,
the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller
box. Then turn the drive gear [B] manually.
SM 6-87 B202/B178/B180
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
Copier ACS
The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,
the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and white
pages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:
1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the black
PCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black and
white page.
2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUs
if a color page occurs in the job.
3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in
the upper position and keeps
operating the four PCUs after the first K K Color Color K K Color
the Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs are
in operation.
Original
Key
B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color
Auto Color Select Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or four
PCUs
Full Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs
Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU
B202/B178/B180 6-88 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
Printer ACS
The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu: > Printer
Features > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on.
The ACS does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in
operation.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-89 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
6.12 FUSING
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1
13 3
12
4
6
11
7
10
9 8 B178D003.WMF
• A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
hot and pressure roller system.
• The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing
belt quickly.
• The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing the
fusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.
• Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp.
– NA: 770W for the heating roller. 350W for the pressure roller
– EU: 700W for the heating roller. 325W for the pressure roller
• The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control the
temperature of these lamps.
• Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. SP1-
104-1 is used to change between on/off control and phase control
• The oil supply roller supplies a small amount of oil to the pressure roller through
the cleaning roller. Oil does not need to be supplied to the oil supply roller
because it contains oil and the amount of oil supplied to the pressure roller is
small.
B202/B178/B180 6-90 SM
FUSING
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[G]
[E]
B178D002.WMF
[F]
Descriptions
friction with the pressure roller. Detailed
Fusing Clutch
The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit does
not operate. This mechanism prevents wear on the belt and rollers.
NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the
transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.
SM 6-91 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to
-70.
When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to those
specified by SP1-104-25.
The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. The
difference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.
B202/B178/B180 6-92 SM
FUSING
Temperature Corrections
The following SP modes are available to prevent excessive glossiness caused by
fusing temperature overshoot:
• 1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the
job.
• 1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced
If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusing
temperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper. This can cause
marks to show on the output. The following SP modes prevents this problem:
• 1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.
Overheat Protection
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp at the following times:
• The heating roller temperature becomes higher than 250°C for two seconds
or more
• The pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210°C for five seconds
or more.
SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for the pressure roller are displayed for
these conditions.
The following components are used if the thermistor overheat protection system
fails.
• Two thermostats for the heating roller and two thermofuses for the pressure roller
in series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp.
• If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 234°C, it opens
and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 235°C, it also
opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
Descriptions
• If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 154°C, the Detailed
thermofuse opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.
In either case, the machine stops operation.
SM 6-93 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
Stand-by Mode
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.) Energy Saver Key ON
-or-
Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Panel-Off Mode (1&2) Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1
-or- Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Energy Saver Timer
(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off Low Power Mode Return Time Less Than 30 s
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Operation Sw. On
Auto Off Mode Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Off Mode
Return Time Less Than 101 s
B178D583.WMF
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has the following two types of energy saver modes:
1) Panel-off mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes:
• Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Panel Off
Timer
• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto Off
Timer
B202/B178/B180 6-94 SM
FUSING
SM 6-95 B202/B178/B180
FUSING
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
B202/B178/B180 6-96 SM
PAPER EXIT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B178D584.WMF
B178D585.WMF
Descriptions
[D]: Junction gate solenoid Detailed
After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the
external paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as
follows:
• To the standard paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is off (default)
• To the external paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is on.
SM 6-97 B202/B178/B180
PAPER EXIT
[A]
B178D586.WMF
When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit. At this time, printing stops.
B202/B178/B180 6-98 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Option
PS3/
Printer/ Data RAM RAM
SD Card 2.5" HDD 2.5" HDD
Scanner Overwrite (512 MB) (512 MB)
Security Unit
SDRAM SDRAM
SD Slot 1 SD Slot 2 SD Slot 3 IDE IDE
DIMM DIMM
Local BUS
System
NVRAM
Flash ROM ASIC CPU
(128 kB)
(16 MB)
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER
PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI
IEEE1394/
File Format Wireless LAN/
BCU USB\NIB FCU G3
Converter Bluetooth/
IEEE1284
Option Option Option Option
Option: Optional component for all models
B178D999.WMF
SM 6-99 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Interface Option:
You can install one of the four network components (IEEE1284, IEEE1394,
Wireless LAN, Bluetooth).
HDD:
Two 40-GB HDDs are standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned as
shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.
B202/B178/B180 6-100 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Volatile/ Initialization
Contents Capacity (MB)
Nonvolatile (SP5-832)
37,500 Nonvolatile
Images 002
25,000 Volatile
Thumbnails 2,400 Nonvolatile 003
Job Logs 10 Nonvolatile 004
Printer fonts 500 Nonvolatile 005
User information 300 Nonvolatile 006
Mail RX data 200 Nonvolatile 007
Mail TX data 1,000 Nonvolatile 008
1,256 Nonvolatile
Designer data 009
1,000 Volatile
Logs 150 Nonvolatile 010
Ricoh interfaces 500 Nonvolatile 011
Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.
Nonvolatile: The data is not lost when you turn the main switch off.
Data Transfer
Memory
The machine executes the direct memory access
(DMA) two times faster than the conventional DMA.
The controller has two identical hard disk drives.
One HDD interface connects these drives with the HDD Interface
memory. There is a 32-bit data bus between the
memory and the HDD interface. There is also a
Descriptions
16-bit data bus between the HDD interface and Detailed
each hard disk drive (two 16-bit data busses in
total).
When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, the
HDD interface divides them into two 16-bit data
and transfers them to each hard disk drive. Hard
disk drive 1 and 2 store data in an address. These
two addresses correspond with each other. When
HDD 1 HDD 2
receiving two 16-bit data from two corresponding
B178D588.WMF
addresses of the hard disk drives, the HDD
interface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.
If an incorrect sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in the
corresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as an incorrect
sector.
SM 6-101 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
γ Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
Dithering & ROP
B178D589.WMF
PCL5e/PCL6c Driver
Host Controller Printer
Engine
(Matching by Host)
RGB
PCL Driver RGB 8 bits
Decode
ICM Engine/ RGB & RGB
ICM profile Scale 8 bits Color
8 bits Matching
CMY
8 bits
BG/UCR,
8 bits • γ Correction
• Toner Limitation
CMY
1 bit
Dithering CMYK
1 bit
&
ROP
B178D590.WMF
B202/B178/B180 6-102 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
PS3 Driver
ColorSvn
Corrected RGB
ColorSync profile
PS3 Matching
CIE XYZ
γ Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
Dithering & ROP
B178D591.WMF
Descriptions
Gray Correction Detailed
Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
SM 6-103 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
• Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo
• Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
B202/B178/B180 6-104 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Locked Print
Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until
the user inputs an ID at the machine’s operation panel. This ID must match the ID
that has been input with the printer driver.
• Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.
• Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.
• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.
• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored
using locked print.
• The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using sample print
and collation.
• Locked print uses the same hard disk partition (6.3 GB) as sample print and
collation.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-105 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Related SP Modes
Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each
protocol.
The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP
mode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.
B202/B178/B180 6-106 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Printer.
NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.
Tray Locking
If “Tray Locking” is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the “locked” tray in the
tray search process.
The “Tray Locking” setting can be specified in the following menu: > System
Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select
(where the “#” indicates the tray number).
NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is always
enabled).
Descriptions
Detailed
Manual Tray Select
If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.
SM 6-107 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Auto Continue
Overview
When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,
15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timer
runs out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matches
the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:
• The interval can be set with the following menu: > Printer Features > System
> Auto Continue.
NOTE: The default setting for this feature is “Off.”
Tray 4 (Optional)
B178D593.WMF
B202/B178/B180 6-108 SM
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Stapling
The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers
support the following stapling positions:
[A]
[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right
corner.
[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right Paper exit [B]
middle edge.
[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right
corner. [C]
Descriptions
[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center. B178D594.WMF Detailed
The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.
Position Paper size
A4, B5, LT A3, Ledger, Legal
Two-tray finisher [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 30 sheets
[A][B][C] 50 sheets 25 sheets
Booklet finisher
[E] — 10 sheets
NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.
SM 6-109 B202/B178/B180
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Punching
To enable a finisher to punch out holes, you must install the optional punch unit to
it. Each punch unit needs the dedicated punch unit. Note that these punch units
are not interchangeable with each other. To make two holes on a sheet of paper,
you must install the two-hole type; to make three, the three-hole type; and to make
four, the four-hole type. The table shows which type you can install to your finisher.
Finisher model Two holes Three holes Four holes
North America N/A
Europe (excluding
N/A
North Europe)
North Europe N/A N/A
: Available
N/A: Not available
B202/B178/B180 6-110 SM
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-111 B202/B178/B180
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.
*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in
HDD. You can use TWAIN scanner functions together with the DOS
unit.
*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.
Overwrite timing
Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print or scanner job is completed.
Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.
If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is being overwritten,
the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.
B202/B178/B180 6-112 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration: Desktop
Print Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans: 1
Resolution: Scan: 600 dpi
Print: 600 dpi
Gradation: Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Print: 2 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Maximum original A3/11" x 17"
size:
Original reference Left rear corner
position:
Copy speed: Normal (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF)
C2k: 24 cpm (color) or 28 cpm (black & white)
C2a: 28 cpm (color) or 35 cpm (black & white)
C2b: 35 cpm (color) or 45 cpm (black & white)
OHP/Thick
C2k: 17 cpm (color/black & white)
C2a: 17 cpm (color/black & white)
C2b: 17 cpm (color/black & white)
First copy (normal C2a/k: Color: 10 seconds or less
mode): Black & white: 8 seconds or less
C2b: Color: 8 seconds or less
Black & white: 6 seconds or less
Warm-up time: 99 seconds or less (23°C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity: Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
Specifications
SM 7-1 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
B202/B178/B180 7-2 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
Complete
Model State Mainframe
system(*1)
Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or Less
J-C2k
Operating 65db(A) or Less 71db(A) or Less
Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or Less
J-C2a
Operating 65db(A) or Less 71db(A) or Less
Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or Less
J-C2b
Operating 67db(A) or Less 73db(A) or Less
(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.
Specifications
SM 7-3 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages: PCL5e/ PCL6c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and PCL5e/ PCL6c:
Gradation: 600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
RPCS:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP
600 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
C2a
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 45 ppm 17 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 45 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
C2b
600 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm
600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
Monochrome 1,800 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm
C2k
600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm
Color 1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm
1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm
B202/B178/B180 7-4 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution: 600 dpi
Available scanning Twain Mode:
Resolution Range: 100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning Scan to E-mail / Folder:
Throughput BW: 50 ppm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /
(ARDF mode): Compression: On (MH))
FC: 35 ppm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi /
Compression: Standard)
Network TWAIN Scan:
BW: 36 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / Binary / 200dpi /
Compression: Data compression (MMR))
FC: 20 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / 16770K colors
/ 200dpi / Compression: Standard quality)
Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,
Wireless LAN
Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
Method: Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG Specifications
SM 7-5 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
Remarks:
Y Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
Y# Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Y* Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
N Not supported
B202/B178/B180 7-6 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Remarks:
Y Supported
Specifications
N Not supported
Y* Stack only (Booklet not supported)
SM 7-7 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
B202/B178/B180 7-8 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer lets you to select the components you want to install.
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/2003. Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each
operating system is provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.
Specifications
SM 7-9 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
Scanner Drivers
• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
Scanner Utilities
• Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
• Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
B202/B178/B180 7-10 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[A]
[J]
[I]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[E]
B178V501.WMF
[F]
Machine
Item Remarks
Code
Copier B178 C
Platen cover G329 B
One from the two
ARDF B714 A
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
Booklet finisher B602 I
from [D], [E], and [F]
Punch unit (for B602) B647 Requires [I]
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
Two-tray finisher B599 G
from [D], [E], and [F]
Punch unit (for B599) B377 Requires [G]
Specifications
Multi-Bin output tray G306 H One from [G], [H], and [I]
One-tray paper feed unit B601 D
Two-tray paper feed unit B598 F One from the three
LCT B600 E
Scanner accessibility
G570 J
option
SM 7-11 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
[F]
[E]
I/F Card Slot
A Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)
B File Format Converter
[A] C Option
SD Card Slot
1 Option
2 Option
3 Service
[B]
[C]
[G]
[D] B178V563.WMF
Machine
Item Remarks
Code
USB 2.0: [F] — Standard
Ethernet: [F] — Standard
Wireless LAN: [A] G813
Bluetooth: [B] B736 You can only install one of these at
IEEE 1394: [C] B581 a time.
B202/B178/B180 7-12 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 ARDF
Paper Size/Weight:
Size A3 to B6, DLT to HLT
Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Size A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Duplex
Weight 50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard Rear left corner
Position:
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Supported Magnification
Ratios:
Copy 50 to 200 %
Color 32.6 to 200 %
Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: 60 W or less
Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4" x 20.4" x 5.9")
Weight: 12 kg
Specifications
SM 7-13 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
B202/B178/B180 7-14 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-15 B202/B178/B180
SPECIFICATIONS
B202/B178/B180 7-16 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: 1) This scanner option also has an operation panel. You cannot operate
the operation panel of the mainframe and the operation panel for the
scanner option at the same time.
2) You need to cover the contact glass of the mainframe with the platen
cover option.
Specifications
SM 7-17 B202/B178/B180
B377
PUNCH UNIT
PUNCH UNIT B377
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. DETAILS .........................................................................................2
2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ...................................................................... 2
2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ................................................................... 4
SM i B377
PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Punch Unit
B377
[B] [A] B377R119.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 4)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3, x 5)
3. Spacers [B]
SM 1 B377
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
2. DETAILS
The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
NOTE: The illustrations below show the unit for Europe for 2/4 hole punching. The
North American unit has five holes for 2/3 hole punching.
[A]
[F]
[D] [E]
[C]
[B]
B377D505.WMF
The punch motor [A] drives the punch mechanism. At the correct time after the
trailing edge of the paper passes the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. The punch clutch [C] turns and drives the punch
heads [D].
The punch HP sensor [E] detects the home position for the actuator. The punch
unit switches off when the cut-out in the punch shaft disk [F] enters the punch HP
sensor.
NOTE: SP6113 (Punch Hole Adjustment) adjusts the punch hole position in the
sub scan direction for two holes (001 2-Hole) or for three holes (002 3-
Hole). Use the spacers provided with the punch unit to adjust the position
of the punch in the main scan direction. For details, refer to the installation
of the punch unit in section “1. Installation”).
B377 2 SM
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
Punch Unit
B377D504.WMF
B377
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes for the job, the punch hole motor [A] turns on until the actuator disk changes
the status of the punch hole switch [B] (until it switches on or off). This indicates
that the cover [C] and the punch cam [D] have moved to one side or the other to
determine which punchers are used.
SM 3 B377
PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B377D506.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
B377 4 SM
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
B598
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
SM i B598
COVER REPLACEMENT
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[A]
B598R102.WMF
SM 1 B598
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A] [C]
B598R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B598 2 SM
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[B]
[A]
B598R103.WMF
SM 3 B598
TRAY LIFT MOTORS
B598R104.WMF
B598R105.WMF
B598 4 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
[A]
B598R107.WMF
[B]
B598R108.WMF
SM 5 B598
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2
10
3
4
9 5
6
7
8 B598D001.WMF
B598 6 SM
OVERVIEW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Paper Feed
Unit B598
Two-Tray
9
10
11
25
12
13
24
14
23
15
22 16
21
17
20
19 18
B598D101.WMF
SM 7 B598
OVERVIEW
11
2
10
6
4
B598D102.WMF
B598 8 SM
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
B599
TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER.................................................................................... 1
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 2
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ................. 3
1.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 3
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 4
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5
1.8 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 5
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................... 7
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS......................................................... 8
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................ 8
1.12 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................... 8
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.......................................................... 9
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR ..................................................................................... 9
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS .............................................................................. 9
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 10
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................. 10
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................ 10
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ......................................................................... 11
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 11
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 12
2.1 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 13
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES........................................................................................................ 13
SM i B599
Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................ 19
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 20
Tray 1 release mechanism..................................................................... 21
4.5.2 TRAY 2 .............................................................................................. 22
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............................................................... 23
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24
Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24
Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................ 25
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25
Stapler Rotation ..................................................................................... 25
Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25
4.7.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 26
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 27
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 28
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................... 28
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................ 29
B599 ii SM
COVERS
[E] B599R151.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
1.1.2 INNER COVER
[A]
[B]
B599R102.WMF
[B]
SM 1 B599
POSITIONING ROLLER
[B]
[A]
B599R103.WMF
B599R104.WMF
B599 2 SM
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR
[C]
[D] B599R105.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
1.5 STAPLER TRAY
B599
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599R106.WMF B599R107.WMF
1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2
INNER COVER)
2. Two clamps [A]
3. Harnesses [B] ( x 8)
4. Stapler tray [C] ( x 2 [D], x 2 [E])
NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.
SM 3 B599
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
[B]
[D]
B599R201.WMF
[A]
[F] [C]
[E]
[G]
B599R109.WMF
[H]
B599R110.WMF
B599 4 SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
B599R111.WMF
[A]
Two-Tray
Finisher
1.8 LIFT MOTORS
B599
[A]
1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)
3. Sensor stay [B] ( x 4)
[B]
B599R203.WMF
SM 5 B599
LIFT MOTORS
[C]
B599R204.WMF
B599R205.WMF
B599 6 SM
LOWER EXIT SENSOR
[A] B599R112.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[B] B599R113.WMF
[E]
[D]
B599R114.WMF
SM 7 B599
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
[B] [C]
1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
[A]
3. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Feeler [C]
5. Lower stack height sensors [D]
[D]
B599R116.WMF
[A]
B599R202.WMF
B599 8 SM
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
Two-Tray
Finisher
[B]
B599
3. Front tray cover [C] ( x 1)
4. Bottom tray cover [D] ( x 2)
[C]
[D]
B599R207.WMF
[E]
B599R208.WMF
SM 9 B599
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
[B]
[C]
[A]
B599R210.WMF
[A]
[B] B599R209.WMF
B599R211.WMF
[A]
B599 10 SM
FINISHER MAIN BOARD
[A]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599R206.WMF
[B] [A]
B599R119.WMF
SM 11 B599
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode Jam Content
Shift 1 Shift 2 Staple
Entrance sensor: After the exit sensor in the main machine
! ! ! no detection went off, the entrance sensor did not switch
on for at least 2 s.
Entrance sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, it did
! ! !
no detection not remain on for at least 150 ms.*1
Upper exit sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, the
! no detection upper exit sensor did not remain on for at
least 59 pulses. *2
Upper exit sensor: After the upper exit sensor switched on, it
!
jam did not switch off within 150 ms. *1
Lower exit sensor: After the entrance sensor switched on, the
! no detection lower exit sensor did not switch on within 59
pulses. *2
Lower exit sensor: After the lower exit sensor switched on, it did
!
jam not switch off within 150 ms. *1
Stapler tray After the entrance sensor switched off, the
! entrance sensor: stapler tray entrance sensor did not switch
no detection on within 102 pulses.*2
Stapler tray After the stapler tray entrance sensor
! entrance sensor: switched on, it did not switch off within 59
jam pulses.*1
Lower tray exit After the transport motor switched on, the
! sensor: no lower tray exit sensor did not switch on
detection within 1260 ms.
*1
: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).
*2
: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.
B599 12 SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
DPS101
Mode Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Default.
1 1 1 0 Free run. No paper.
0 0 0 1 Transportation See the note below.
NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.
2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.
3) Turn on the main switch.
4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.
Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
3.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP101 GND Ground
TP102 5V 5V
TP103 RXD Received command data
TP104 TXD Transmitted command data
3.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU101 Protects 24 V.
SM 13 B599
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
8
2
7
4
6
5
B599D118.WMF
B599 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4
3
2
1 5
6
14
13
7
12
11
15
10
16
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
9 8
B599D104.WMF
17
18 B599D103.WMF
SM 15 B599
JUNCTION GATES
B599D205.WMF
In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate [A]
solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are
off, and prints go to the lower exit.
[B]
B599D206.WMF
In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and [A]
the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints go
to the stapler tray.
[B]
B599D207.WMF
B599 16 SM
TRAY SHIFTING
[F]
[A] [B]
[C]
[D] [E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599D106.WMF
B599
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)
In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.
The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of
tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].
After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear
disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.
Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a
cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift
sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.
The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite
direction until the other shift sensor is activated.
SM 17 B599
TRAY SHIFTING
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599D105.WMF
In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.
The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the
tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side
to side (not just the tray).
After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the
tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is
delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous
position.
B599 18 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[C]
[H]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[G]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D204.WMF
Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
SM 19 B599
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
Staple Mode
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[C] [F]
B599D204.WMF
In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go
to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper
exit.
Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1
then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.
When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of
the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]
detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).
The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2
sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height
has exceeded the overflow limit.
B599 20 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
Two-Tray
Finisher
page), the tray has moved past the sensors
B599
at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turns
on again until the gear disk activates the
tray shift sensor [E]. This moves the tray
back against the finisher.
Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects that
the tray is at the correct height.
B599D202.WMF
SM 21 B599
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.5.2 TRAY 2
[H]
[A]
[E]
Overflow condition
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[C] Multi Tray Staple Mode Normal Mode
[F]
B599D500.WMF
[G]
B599D109.WMF
The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.
When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the
tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see
‘Normal Mode’ in the above diagram).
In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine
detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the
actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].
The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and
stops the tray 2 lift motor.
The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.
B599 22 SM
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B599D200.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.
During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates
the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].
The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the
paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving
the pre-stack tray.
At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second
sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the
pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of
the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both
sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.
SM 23 B599
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F] [D]
B599D110.WMF
In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when
it arrives in the stapler tray.
B599 24 SM
STAPLER MECHANISM
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E] [B]
B599D112.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[C] B599D113.WMF
The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the
requirements of the selected stapling mode.
Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit
[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves
from front to rear of the finisher.
When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves to
the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees
(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.
Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by
the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler
moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling
position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.
After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,
determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].
SM 25 B599
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B]
[C]
B599D208.WMF
[A]
The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When
stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple
hammer motor then stops.
The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple
cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler
cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this
condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job
will not stop.
The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling
position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on
to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple
sheet.
If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message
to appear on the operation panel.
B599 26 SM
STAPLER MECHANISM
[A]
[C]
[I]
[B]
[D]
B599D115.WMF
[G]
[E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[F] [H] B599D114.WMF
When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit
guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate
sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.
After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]
on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].
The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have
started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack
feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [H].
When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide
safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This
prevents damage to the user’s fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray
is moving up.
SM 27 B599
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B599D102.WMF
[B]
[H]
[I]
B599D101.WMF
[F] [G]
B599 28 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
[A]
[B]
[C]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D153.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
SM 29 B599
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
B600
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME.................................... 1
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 1
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 2
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................ 3
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH.................................. 5
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 6
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 7
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ......... 8
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9
SM i B600
DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[A]
B600R101.WMF
B600R102.WMF
SM 1 B600
CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE
[B]
A4
A4
Lt
Lt B600R103.WMF
B600 2 SM
LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR
[B]
[A]
[C]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
B600R104.WMF
SM 3 B600
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
B600R105.WMF
[B]
B600R106.WMF
B600 4 SM
TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
[C]
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[B]
B600R107.WMF
SM 5 B600
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[B]
[A]
B600R108.WMF
B600 6 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[C]
[B]
B600R109.WMF
SM 7 B600
UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
[A] [C]
[B]
[D]
B600R111.WMF
B600 8 SM
PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
[C]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[A] [B]
B600R110.WMF
SM 9 B600
OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
11
B600D001.WMF
13 12
B600 10 SM
OVERVIEW
5 6 7
8
4 9
3
2 10
11
1
12
13
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
14
15
16
17
B600D101.WMF
20 19 18
SM 11 B600
PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
B600D102.WMF
B600 12 SM
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
[C]
[E]
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
B600D107.WMF
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B600D108.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
SM 13 B600
TRAY LIFT
[F]
[G] [E]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B600D103.WMF
[B]
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back face
turns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled to
the lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.
When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns off
and the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is
gradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning the
sensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray will
then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor off
again).
When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor and
base plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall
(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
B600 14 SM
NEAR END/END DETECTION
Capacity Tray
page). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.
Large
The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor
B600
outputs, as shown in the following table.
Amount of paper
100% 75% 50%
Paper Height Sensor 1 " " " " " " $ " "
Paper Height Sensor 2 " " " " " $ – " $
Paper Height Sensor 3 " " $ " " – – $ –
Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Paper Height Sensor 4 " " " $ $ " " " "
Paper Height Sensor 5 " $ " $ $ " " $ $
Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " " $ " " " "
Amount of paper
25% Near-end End
Paper Height Sensor 1 $ " " " " $ $ –
Paper Height Sensor 2 – " $ " $ – – –
Paper Height Sensor 3 – $ – $ – – – –
Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ "
Paper Height Sensor 4 " $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Paper Height Sensor 5 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " $ $ " $ $
Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)
Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)
The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.
Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 5 Paper Height
Sensor2
Paper Height
Sensor 4 Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
B600D112.WMF
SM 15 B600
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM
[A]
B600D104.WMF
When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport
clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left
tray to the right tray.
While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fence
open/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the side
fence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motor
reverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.
B600 16 SM
RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
[B]
Capacity Tray
Large
B600
[C]
B600D106.WMF
[E] [D]
B600D111.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and
causes the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and
the actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in
the tray.
When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this also
lifts up the feeler.
SM 17 B600
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
B601
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
SM i B601
COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
B601R102.WMF
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 1 B601
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A] [C]
B601R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B601 2 SM
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
[B]
[A]
B601R103.WMF
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 3 B601
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A] B601R104.WMF
[C] B601R105.WMF
B601 4 SM
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B601R106.WMF
Paper Feed
One-Tray
B601
Unit
SM 5 B601
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2
B601D001.WMF
1. Pick-up Roller
2. Paper Feed Roller
3. Relay Roller
4. Separation Roller
5. Tray
B601 6 SM
OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7
11
14
12
13
B601D101.WMF
B601
Unit
SM 7 B601
OVERVIEW
B601D102.WMF
B601 8 SM
BOOKLET FINISHER
B602
BOOKLET FINISHER B602
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 REGULAR TRAY.......................................................................................... 1
1.2 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2.1 FRONT COVER................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER ................................. 3
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ...................................................................... 5
1.3 SIDE GUIDE................................................................................................. 6
Removal................................................................................................... 6
Reassembly ............................................................................................. 6
1.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 7
Removal................................................................................................... 7
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase.......................................................... 10
1.5 FOLDING UNIT .......................................................................................... 13
Removal................................................................................................. 13
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase .................................................. 15
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE ....................................................... 16
1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT........................................................................... 16
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT ..................................................................... 18
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ........................................................................... 20
1.8 TRANSPORT ............................................................................................. 22
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................................... 22
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER ..................................................................... 22
1.9 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 24
1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER ....................................................... 24
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE..................................................................... 25
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER....................................................... 27
Removal................................................................................................. 27
Reassembly ........................................................................................... 29
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD ..................................................................................... 30
1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 30
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD............................. 30
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER....................................... 32
1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR..................................... 32
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ............................................................... 34
1.11.3 CONTROLLER ................................................................................ 35
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD .............................................................. 35
1.11.5 LED BOARD .................................................................................... 36
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................ 37
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION............................................. 38
Sensor Voltage ...................................................................................... 38
SM i B602
Punch Type............................................................................................ 39
EEPROM ............................................................................................... 39
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 41
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 41
3.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 42
3.3 CONTROLLER ........................................................................................... 43
3.4 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT.............................................................................. 44
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 44
Stack-Tray Belt ...................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 SORT................................................................................................. 45
3.4.3 STACK............................................................................................... 46
Paddle.................................................................................................... 46
Stack-Tray Stopper ................................................................................ 46
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 47
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 48
Home Position ....................................................................................... 48
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 48
Safety Feature ....................................................................................... 48
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49
Action..................................................................................................... 49
Drive ...................................................................................................... 49
Home Position ....................................................................................... 49
Paper Position ....................................................................................... 50
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 51
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position .............................................................. 51
3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.5.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 53
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 53
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 53
Sensors.................................................................................................. 53
3.5.3 POSITIONING ................................................................................... 54
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54
Home Position and Ready Position........................................................ 54
Staple Position ....................................................................................... 55
3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 57
Ready Position....................................................................................... 57
Paper Sensor......................................................................................... 58
B602 ii SM
Paper Full .............................................................................................. 58
Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58
3.7 SADDLE STITCH ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.2 STACK TRAY .................................................................................... 60
3.7.3 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 60
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT ....................................................................... 61
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Mechanism....................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Home Position.................................................................. 62
Folder Rollers Mechanism ..................................................................... 63
Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................ 63
Shape of Folder Rollers ......................................................................... 64
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 65
3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................ 65
Slide Unit ............................................................................................... 65
Home Position ....................................................................................... 65
Registration............................................................................................ 65
3.8.2 PUNCH.............................................................................................. 67
Types of Punch Unit............................................................................... 67
Drive ...................................................................................................... 67
Home Position ....................................................................................... 67
Two Holes and Four Holes .................................................................... 68
Two or Three Holes ............................................................................... 69
SM iii B602
REGULAR TRAY
[A]
B602R901.WMF
Booklet Fin-
1.2 COVERS
isher
B602
1.2.1 FRONT COVER
[A]
[B]
B602R987.WMF B602R988.WMF
SM 1 B602
COVERS
[A]
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob
[B].
5. [C] x 2
[C]
B602R902.WMF
[B]
[D]
B602R903.WMF
B602 2 SM
COVERS
[B]
[D]
[C]
B602R905.WMF
B602R904.WMF
Booklet Fin-
NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].
isher
B602
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER
[A]
B602R907.WMF
SM 3 B602
COVERS
[A] [D]
[B]
B602R908.WMF
[C] B602R906.WMF
B602 4 SM
COVERS
[A]
B602R910.WMF
Booklet Fin-
5. Upper right cover [B]
( [C] x 1, 4 hooks)
isher
B602
[B]
[C]
B602R911.WMF
SM 5 B602
SIDE GUIDE
B602R912.WMF
[E]
B602R913.WMF
Reassembly
Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] and
the side guide. After installing the side guide, check
that the feeler link moves with the feeler.
[A] [B]
B602R914.WMF
B602 6 SM
STAPLER UNIT
B602R915.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[D]
B602R989.WMF
[F]
[G] B602R990.WMF
SM 7 B602
STAPLER UNIT
[B]
[A]
B602R918.WMF
[I] [F]
B602R919.WMF
B602 8 SM
STAPLER UNIT
[A]
Booklet Fin-
B602R920.WMF
isher
B602
SM 9 B602
STAPLER UNIT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B602R917.WMF
[C]
[B]
B602R921.WMF
B602 10 SM
STAPLER UNIT
[A]
B602R922.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[B]
[D]
[C] B602R923.WMF
[E] B602R924.WMF
SM 11 B602
STAPLER UNIT
[A]
B602R925.WMF
B602R926.WMF
[F] [G]
B602R927.WMF
B602 12 SM
FOLDING UNIT
[A]
[D]
Booklet Fin-
[B]
isher
B602
B602R991.WMF
[F]
B602R929.WMF
SM 13 B602
FOLDING UNIT
[A]
[B] B602R930.WMF
[C]
[D] [F]
[E]
B602R931.WMF
B602 14 SM
FOLDING UNIT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R932.WMF
B602R994.WMF
1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.
2. Install the gears as follows:
• Align either of the two “"” marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the “"”
marks [D] on the relay gear. The “"” marks on the relay gear must be at one
o'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.
• Align the other “"” mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab
(“#”) on the roller gear [F].
NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relay
gear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.
SM 15 B602
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
[A]
[B]
[B]
B602R934.WMF
[A]
1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Side guide (! 1.3)
3. [A] x 2
4. [B] x 5, 2 standoffs
[C]
[D]
B602R935.WMF
B602 16 SM
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
6. [A] x 3
7. Open the cable fasteners [B].
8. Release the cables [C].
[C]
[B]
Booklet Fin-
[A]
isher
B602
B602R936.WMF
[E]
[D]
[F] B602R937.WMF
SM 17 B602
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
11. [A] x 2
12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and
lift it.
[B]
[A]
B602R938.WMF
[A]
B602R939.WMF
B602 18 SM
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
[B]
[A]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R940.WMF
B602R941.WMF
SM 19 B602
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
[B]
[A]
B602R942.WMF [E]
6. Cable fastener [E] ( x 2)
B602R944.WMF
[F]
B602R945.WMF
B602 20 SM
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
8. [A] x 3
[A]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R946.WMF
[C]
B602R947.WMF
[B]
SM 21 B602
TRANSPORT
1.8 TRANSPORT
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Cable guide [A] ( x 1)
3. Transport motor (with the timing belt [A]
behind) [B] ( x 1, x 3)
B602R948.WMF
[A] [B]
B602R949.WMF
B602 22 SM
TRANSPORT
[A]
7. [A] x 2
B602R950.WMF
Booklet Fin-
9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]
isher
B602
10. Bushing [D] ( x 1)
11. [E] x 1
[E]
12. Paper guide [F] [F] [C]
B602R951.WMF
B602R952.WMF
SM 23 B602
STACK TRAY
[A]
B602R953.WMF
[C]
B602R954.WMF
[D]
B602 24 SM
STACK TRAY
[B]
4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],
and push it down.
5. In the same manner, remove the [A]
other roller [B].
B602R955.WMF
Booklet Fin-
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)
[B]
isher
B602
2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
SM 25 B602
STACK TRAY
[A]
B602R956.WMF
[B]
B602R957.WMF
5. Paddle [C]
[C]
B602R958.WMF
B602 26 SM
STACK TRAY
[B]
[A]
B602R959.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
B602R960.WMF
[D]
4. Paper guide [F] ( [D] x 1)
[F]
B602R961.WMF
SM 27 B602
STACK TRAY
[A]
B602R962.WMF
[C]
B602R963.WMF
[E]
B602R964.WMF
B602 28 SM
STACK TRAY
[A]
B602R965.WMF
Reassembly
When reassembling, align the positions of
the belt pawls [A][B]. [A]
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
[B]
B602R966.WMF
SM 29 B602
CIRCUIT BOARD
B602R967.WMF
[A]
[A]
B602R969.WMF
B602 30 SM
CIRCUIT BOARD
[C]
B602R970.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
5. Home position board [D]
( x 1, 1 flat cable)
[D] B602R971.WMF
SM 31 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
B602R993.WMF
[B]
B602R973.WMF
B602 32 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
[A]
B602R974.WMF
Booklet Fin-
7. Base cover [C] ( x 2, [D] x 2) (The
isher
B602
diagram shows the view seen from the
bottom.)
[B]
[C]
B602R975.WMF
[D]
SM 33 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
[A]
B602R976.WMF
[B]
B602R978.WMF
B602R979.WMF
B602 34 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
1.11.3 CONTROLLER
[A]
B602R980.WMF
Booklet Fin-
isher
B602
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD
[A]
B602R981.WMF
SM 35 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
[A]
4. Photo sensor board [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor
board, adjust the sensor voltage
(! 1.11.7).
B602R982.WMF
B602R983.WMF
B602 36 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
[A]
B602R984.WMF
Booklet Fin-
adjust the sensor voltage (!
isher
B602
1.11.7).
[B]
B602R985.WMF
[C]
B602R986.WMF
SM 37 B602
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
Sensor Voltage
You make the controller adjust the LED
voltage of the sensors after you have
replaced any of the following units and
components:
• Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
• Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)
B602R995.WMF
• LED board (! 1.11.5)
• Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)
• Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)
[H]
Perform as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].
2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjust
the LED voltage of the sensors.
3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.
This indicates the controller ends the adjustment. [I] B602R996.WMF
B602R997.WMF
B602 38 SM
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
Booklet Fin-
4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in the
isher
B602
EEPROM.
5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [K].
B602R997.WMF
EEPROM [L]
After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize the
new EEPROM as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:
1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].
2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controller
starts initializing the EEPROM.
B602R999.WMF
SM 39 B602
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Punch Controller Board
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
SW1001
Mode Description
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF Default
ON OFF ON OFF Sensor voltage adjustment See 1.11.7.
ON ON OFF ON Punch type setting See 1.11.7.
ON ON OFF OFF EEPROM initialization See 1.11.7.
B602 40 SM
GENERAL LAYOUT
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8
9
20
10
19
18
11
17 12
Finisher
Booklet
B602
13
16
14
15
B602D901.WMF
SM 41 B602
DRIVE
3.2 DRIVE 1
4
5
B602D902.WMF
B602 42 SM
CONTROLLER
3.3 CONTROLLER
Motor
Controller board
Controller
board
Sensor
CPU (IC13)
EEP-ROM (IC12)
Motors
Communication IC
(IC11)
Clutches
EP-ROM (IC6)
Switches
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Regulator IC (IC1)
Sensors
Main unit
Controller board
B602D903.WMF
The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional
punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of important
ICs:
• CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.
• EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.
• Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.
• EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.
• Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.
SM 43 B602
STACK TRAY
[C]
[D] [E]
B602D904.WMF
Stack-Tray Belt
The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support
[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts
counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports moves
counterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from the
stack tray to the regular tray.
For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see “Stack-Tray Belt Home Position” in
section 3.4.5.
B602 44 SM
STACK TRAY
3.4.2 SORT
The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and the
regular tray.
Finisher
Booklet
B602
belts (! 3.4.1) transport the paper stack
[C] to the regular tray.
[D]
Phase 3: The finisher repeats Phase 1
and Phase 2 until it finishers handling the
first set of paper.
Every time phase 3 ends, the finisher stacks one set of paper on the regular tray.
The diagram shows the paper stack [D] on the regular tray after the finisher stacks
four sets of paper. The arrow [E] indicates the direction of paper travel.
SM 45 B602
STACK TRAY
3.4.3 STACK
Paddle
[B]
[A] [C]
[D]
B602D906.WMF
B602D907.WMF
There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down the
paper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper
(viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles.
Stack-Tray Stopper
The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while the
exit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.
B602D908.WMF
B602 46 SM
STACK TRAY
[A]
[B]
B602D906.WMF B602D909.WMF
[C]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D910.WMF
The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays away
from the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:
• When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray
• When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper
The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])
under either of the following conditions:
• When the stapler operates
• When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belt
transport the paper
SM 47 B602
STACK TRAY
Stapler Switch
The second lever [H] moves with the
stapler-switch actuator [J]. When the first
lever pushes the second lever (in other
words, when the stack tray guide is in its
lower position), the actuator pushes the
stapler switch [K], turning it on. The stapler [I]
can operate only when this switch is on.
Safety Feature
The stapler switch, along with the stack-
B602D949.WMF
tray guide mechanism, works as a safety
feature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.
When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the stapler
through the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,
staples do not injure the user.
B602 48 SM
STACK TRAY
[B]
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE
[I]
[G]
[E]
[D]
[A] [C]
[H]
[F]
B602D911.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Action
There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two
jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.
Drive
The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the
jogger fences.
Home Position
There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] and
the rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator
[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the
jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.
SM 49 B602
STACK TRAY
Paper Position
To align the paper to the front of the ↑ Rear
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as [A]
follows:
• The rear fence [A] pushes the
paper [B] to the front each time the
exit roller transports the paper to [B]
the stack tray.
• The front fence [C] stays at the
front side.
[C]
Regular tray
↓ Front B602D912.WMF
↑ Rear
To align the paper to the rear side of the [D]
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
• The rear fence [D] stays at the [E]
rear side.
• The front fence [E] pushes the
paper [F] to the rear each time the
exit roller transports the paper to [F]
the stack tray.
Regular tray
B602D913.WMF
↓ Front
B602 50 SM
STACK TRAY
[A] [I]
[F]
[G]
B602D906.WMF
[H]
[B] [C]
B602D915.WMF
[E]
[J]
[K]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D914.WMF
[D]
B602D916.WMF
Mechanism
The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:
1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].
2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-tray
lower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of
paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (! 3.4.1).
3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to
count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.
4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
paddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].
5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].
SM 51 B602
STAPLING
3.5 STAPLING
3.5.1 OVERVIEW
The finisher staples the paper as [B] [A]
follows:
B602 52 SM
STAPLING
3.5.2 STAPLER
Mechanism [A]
B602D918.WMF B602D919.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D920.WMF
The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! “Action and Drive” in section
3.5.3).
Stapler Switch
See “Stapler Switch” in section 3.4.3.
Sensors
There are three sensors inside the stapler:
• Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects the
cam position.
• Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.
• Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end of
the staple.
The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensor
on the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).
SM 53 B602
STAPLING
3.5.3 POSITIONING
Front
[A]
[C]
[B]
[K]
[J] [D]
[I]
[E]
[F]
Rear [G]
[H]
B602D921.WMF
B602 54 SM
STAPLING
Staple Position
The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates the
distance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) and
the staple position
Finisher
Booklet
B602
position [D].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].
[F]
Rear-End One Staple
1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].
2. The stapler/folder motor drives the [E]
stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
The stapler does not move to the front.
The stack-tray stopper [E] keeps
standing
B602D923.WMF
SM 55 B602
STAPLING
[G]
Two Staples
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts, [H]
the stapler is in the ready position [G].
[J]
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor. [I]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler
lowers the stack-tray stopper [J].
B602D924.WMF
4. When the pulse count reaches the
predefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.
The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.
6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.
7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second stapling
position [I].
8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
Saddle Stitch
1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollers
transport the paper to the stapler unit
until the center of the paper [K]
reaches the stapling positions (!
3.7.4).
2. The stapler operates as described in
the previous paragraph (! Two
Staples).
B602D925.WMF
[K]
B602 56 SM
REGULAR TRAY
[A]
[B] [E]
[C] [F]
[G]
[D]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
[H]
[I]
B602D926.WMF
Ready Position
Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the lift
motor sets the regular tray in the ready position:
1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motor
encoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.
2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the lift motor.
3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.
4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of the
paper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.
SM 57 B602
REGULAR TRAY
Paper Sensor
As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper height
sensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signals
from the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paper
is on the tray.
To find the paper on the regular tray, the controller references the paper sensor [E].
This sensor detects the paper but does not detect the tray.
Paper Full
While the stack-tray rollers and belts continue to transport the paper to the regular
tray, the ready position becomes lower (! Ready Position). When the number of
paper reaches about 500 sheets, the paper full sensor [B] is interrupted by its
actuator. When the number of paper reaches about 1,000 sheets, the lower limit
sensor [C] is interrupted by its actuator. To decide the paper-full status, the
controller considers these sensor signals and the paper sizes. The table lists the
paper sizes and the numbers of paper in the paper-full status.
Paper Size Number of Paper
A3, B4, DLT, LG About 500 sheets
Smaller sizes About 1,000 sheets
B602 58 SM
SADDLE STITCH
2
1
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D927.WMF
SM 59 B602
SADDLE STITCH
B602D928.WMF
B602D950.WMF
3.7.3 STAPLER
The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paper
is set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheet
of paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.
B602 60 SM
SADDLE STITCH
[A]
[B]
B602D931.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
B602D930.WMF
The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:
1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home position
sensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.
2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]
between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The center
of the paper is in the folding position.
SM 61 B602
SADDLE STITCH
[E]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B602D932.WMF
B602D933.WMF
The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates as
follows:
1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.
2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/folder
motor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding plate
presses the paper between the folder rollers.
3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to its
home position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.
B602 62 SM
SADDLE STITCH
[A]
[G]
[B]
[C] [H]
[D]
[E]
Finisher
Booklet
B602D935.WMF
B602
B602D934.WMF
The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operate
as follows:
1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.
2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] and
transport it to the booklet tray [E].
SM 63 B602
SADDLE STITCH
Folding Plate
[A]
B602D936.WMF
Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except both
ends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.
B602 64 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
Home Position
The home position of the slide unit (in
other words, the home position of the
paper edge sensors) is detected by the
registration home position sensor [F].
B602D937.WMF
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Registration [F] [E]
Registration is executed as follows:
1. When the paper [D] comes from the main [G]
unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper is [D]
detected by the paper edge sensor [H].
2. The registration motor starts to operate.
The slide unit [G] moves to the front.
[H]
[I] B602D938.WMF
SM 65 B602
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
B602D939.WMF
[C]
B602D940.WMF
[D]
B602D941.WMF
B602 66 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
3.8.2 PUNCH
Types of Punch Unit
There are four types:
• 2 holes
• 2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching from
the operation panel or the printer driver.)
• 4 holes
• 4 holes
There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.
Drive
[A] [C]
[D]
Finisher
Booklet
B602
[B]
B602D942.WMF
The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two of
them are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. The
punch motor [A] drives the punch cams.
Home Position
The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encoder
sensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjusts
the home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.
SM 67 B602
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
Phase 1 [A]
1) The punch is in the home position.
1) 2) 3)
The punch home position sensor [A] [B]
is on. When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a forward
turn.
2) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is punched.
3) When the punch cam has made a
180-degree turn, the punch comes
back to the home position. Note that
B602D943.WMF
the punch cam [B] is not in the
previous position.
Phase 2
4) 5) 6)
4) The punch is in the home position.
The punch home position sensor is
on. When the second sheet of paper
is set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
5) When the punch cam has made a 90-
degree turn, a hole is punched.
6) When the punch cam has made 180-
degree turn, the punch comes back
to its home position. Note that the B602D944.WMF
B602 68 SM
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
Phase 1
1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)
[A]
B602D946.WMF
[B]
B602D945.WMF Standby
Working
Finisher
Booklet
B602
Working punches operate as Standby punches operate as
follows: follows:
1) The punch is in the home 1) When the first sheet of paper is
position. The punch home set, the punch cam starts a
position sensor [A] is on. When forward turn.
the first sheet of paper is set, the 2) When the punch cam has made a
punch cam starts a forward turn. 90-degree turn, the punch is away
2) When the punch cam has made a from the paper.
180-degree turn, a hole is 3) When the punch cam has made a
punched. 180-degree turn, the punch is
3) When the punch cam has made a back to the home position.
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position.
SM 69 B602
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
Phase 2
4) 5) 6) 4) 5) 6)
[A]
B602D948.WMF
[B]
B602D947.WMF Standby
Working
Phase 3
• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602 70 SM
B712
FAX OPTION TYPE 3245
B712
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1
1.2 FAX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 4
When you use the hand set or an external telephone:............................. 5
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT .................................................................................. 6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 7
Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports................ 8
1.4 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 11
1.5 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12
Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12
Installation Procedure ............................................................................ 13
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................15
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 15
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 27
3.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 30
3.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 30
3.3.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 30
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 31
4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................32
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 32
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 32
Entering and Exiting SP Mode ............................................................... 32
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 33
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 34
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 34
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................. 35
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 41
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 51
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 57
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 63
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 71
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 78
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 84
SM i B712
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 84
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 84
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 90
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 99
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 99
4.4.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 100
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 103
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................131
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 131
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .......................................... 132
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 133
4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 134
5. MACHINE CONFIGURATION .................................................................... 135
B712 ii SM
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
1. INSTALLATION
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
WARNING
1. Never install telephone during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when you install or modify telephone lines.
5. Do not use the telephone (other than a cordless type) during an
electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the
vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord before you
install the fax unit.
2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if
a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discard
batteries in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions and local
regulations.
SM 1 B712
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
Start
Yes
Do you install No
the handset?
Yes
Specify necessary
settings.
Do you install No
the optional G3 unit?
Check the operations.
Yes
End
B712I910.WMF
B712 2 SM
FAX UNIT
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:
Description Q’ty
1. Fax key ................................................................................2
2. Fax panel.............................................................................1
3. Stamp ..................................................................................1
4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1
5. Serial number decal.............................................................1
6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1
7. Cable holder ........................................................................1
8. Base bracket (for North America model only) ......................1
9. Core.....................................................................................1
10.Telephone line (for North America model only) ..................1
1 2 3
6
4
7
5
10
8 B712I906.WMF
9
NOTE: You need the cable holder when you install the optional handset (North
America model only).
SM 3 B712
FAX UNIT
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.
[F]
[E]
[H]
7. Remove the key cover [E]. Then
install one of the fax keys [F].
8. Remove the panel cover [G]. Then [G]
install the fax panel [H].
B603I902.WMF
B712 4 SM
FAX UNIT
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[A]
B603I903.WMF
10. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).
11. Connect the telephone line to “LINE 1” jack at the
left of the machine.
12. Turn the main switch on. [C]
[B]
13. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set. G307I105.WMF
14. Enter the service mode. Then program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3-
102-000). You can find the serial number on the serial number decal (attached
to the machine in step 5).
When you use the hand set or an external telephone:
Put the core [A] to the telephone line for the handset or an
external telephone as shown.
[A]
B178I564.WMF
SM 5 B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Description Q’ty
1. G3 board..............................................................................1
2. Interface board ....................................................................1
3. CCU drive board ..................................................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................1
5. Flat cable .............................................................................1
6. Clamp ..................................................................................1
7. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................10
8. Telephone line (for North America model only) ...................1
1 2 3 4
5
8 7 6 B713I101.WMF
B712 6 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Installation Procedure
Fax Option
Type 3245
CAUTION
B712
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.
[B]
[A]
B713I001.WMF
1. Remove the fax controller board [A] from the fax controller base [B] ( x 3,
x 6).
SM 7 B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
[A]
[B] [G]
[F]
[E]
[D] [C]
B713I002.WMF
B712 8 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[A]
[B]
[H]
[G]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[C]
B713I003.WMF
1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).
2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.
NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.
3. Connect the two G3 boards [C] to the interface board [D].
4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E] and the "LINE 3" cover [F].
5. Attach the interface board and two G3 boards to the spacers ( x 8).
6. Connect the cable [G] to the interface board and CCU drive board.
7. Attach the clamp [H] and bind the cable [G] with this clamp.
SM 9 B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
B712 10 SM
EXPANSION MEMORY
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[A]
B712I002.WMF
SM 11 B712
HANDSET
1.5 HANDSET
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:
Description Q’ty
1. Handset cradle ....................................................................1
2. Handset ...............................................................................1
3. Screw M3 x 8 .......................................................................2
4. Screw M3 x 14 .....................................................................2
1 2
4 3
B433I909.WMF
B712 12 SM
HANDSET
Installation Procedure
Fax Option
Type 3245
[E]
B712
[A] [D]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
B603I907.WMF
SM 13 B712
NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
B712 14 SM
ERROR CODES
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
SM 15 B712
ERROR CODES
B712 16 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3245
0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
B712
capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s memory
functions. is full.
• Confidential rx
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected • Check the line connection.
after modem training in • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
confidential or transfer mode • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-08.
0-20 Facsimile data not received • Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Check for line problems.
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) • Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
from the other end not line.
received within 5 s of the • Check for line noise or other line problems.
previous EOL signal • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
• Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other • Check the line connection.
end was interrupted for • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
more than the acceptable • Replace the NCU or FCU.
modem carrier drop time
• Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms)
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
SM 17 B712
ERROR CODES
B712 18 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3245
0-76 The calling terminal fell back • The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
B712
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in • Check the line connection and condition.
response to a CM • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77 The called terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a CJ in • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
response to JM JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
signal. T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected • The guard timer expired while starting these
due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
phase 2 – line probing. signal level can cause these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 • Try making a call at a later time.
phase 3 – equalizer training. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
0-82 The line was disconnected dedicated tx parameters.
due to a timeout in the V.34 • Try increasing the tx level.
phase 4 – control channel
• Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
start-up.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart • Try increasing the tx level.
sequence. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 phase 4 – control • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.
0-85 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 control channel restart. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected • The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
0-87 The control channel started • The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary
primary channel. channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
SM 19 B712
ERROR CODES
B712 20 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3245
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
B712
was received • Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the line connection.
• Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data • Check the line connection.
frame not received within 18 • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
s of CFR, but there was no • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
line fail
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding • Defective FCU.
error • The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received • The other end pressed Stop during
in reply to PPS.NULL communication.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still • Check for line noise.
received at the other end • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
after all communication dedicated tx parameter for that address).
attempts at 2400 bps • Check the line connection.
• Defective remote terminal.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during • The other terminal may be defective or
high speed modem incompatible.
communication
6-22 The machine resets the • Check for line noise.
sequence because of an • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel • Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped • Replace the FCU.
within 6 s
13-17 SIP user name registration • Double registration of the SIP user name.
error • Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error • Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
• Defective SIP server.
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
SM 21 B712
ERROR CODES Rev. 05/2006
B712 22 SM
Rev. 05/2006 ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3245
14-18 Internal processing error Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest
B712
version.
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
• The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
• HDD is full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
• Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
• HDD full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
Error Detected by NFAX due to a software error.
14-33 No Mail Address For the Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
Machine address of the network administrator is registered.
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:
• Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
• Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
Error • The address book was being edited.
• The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed All addresses for return notification mail failed.
for All Destinations
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not At startup, the system detected that the IP address
Registered of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
Information Not Registered registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
• Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
• Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
SM 23 B712
ERROR CODES Rev. 05/2006
B712 24 SM
Rev. 05/2006 ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3245
15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the
B712
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
15-74 MDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-81 Repeated Destination Could not repeat receive the transmission because
Registration Error the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
• The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
• Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station Function The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
22-00 Original length exceeded the Divide the original into more than one page.
maximum scan length Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machine’s printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to The job started normally but did not finish normally;
line disconnection at the data may or may not have been received fully.
other end Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store • Update the ROM
received data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.
SM 25 B712
ERROR CODES Rev. 05/2006
B712 26 SM
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
1. Connection with • Check that the LAN
the LAN cable is connected to
the machine.
• Check that the LEDs
on the hub are lit.
General LAN
2. LAN activity • Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
1. Network settings on • Check the network • Is the IP address
the PC settings on the PC. registered in the
TCP/IP properties in
the network setup
correct? Check the IP
address with the
administrator of the
network.
2. Check that PC can • Use the “ping” • At the MS-DOS
Between IFAX connect with the command on the PC prompt, type ping then
and PC machine to contact the the IP address of the
machine. machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User
• Check if there is an IP Tools.
address conflict with • If there is an IP
other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User
Between • Check if there is an IP Tools.
machine and e- address conflict with • If there is an IP
mail server other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
SM 27 B712
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
2. E-mail account on • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator
the server machine can log into to check.
the e-mail server.
• Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Between
machine and e- 3. E-mail server • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator
mail server client devices which to check.
have an account in • Send a test e-mail
the server can with the machine’s
send/receive e-mail. own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
1. E-mail account on • Make sure that the PC • Ask the administrator
the Server can log into the e-mail to check.
server.
• Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
2. E-mail server • Make sure that the • Ask the administrator
client devices which to check.
have an account in • Send a test e-mail
Between e-mail the server can with the machine’s
server and send/receive e-mail. own number as the
internet destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
3. Destination e-mail Make sure that the e-
address mail address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.
B712 28 SM
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Fax Option
Route
Type 3245
Use the “ping” command • Ask the administrator
B712
4. Router settings
to contact the router. of the server to check.
Between e-mail
Check that other devices
server and
connected to the router
internet
can sent data over the
router.
1. Error message by • Check whether e-mail • Inform the
e-mail from the can be sent to another administrator of the
network of the address on the same LAN.
Between e-mail destination. network, using the
server and
application e-mail
internet software.
• Check the error e-mail
message.
SM 29 B712
FAX SC CODES
3.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
• SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the “OFF” position.
• The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.
• SD card connection was loose.
B712 30 SM
FAX SC CODES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Sys Switch Sys Switch
B712
Suggested
SC Code Description
Action 1F bit 7 = 0 1F bit 7 = 1
1001 FCU error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic SC Code
(See section 2.3.1.for reset display
the initialization
procedure)
1201 Unrecoverable FCU - Refer to section 2.3.2. “Service Call”
SRAM error display
1299 Software error Initialize the fax unit. Automatic
1305 reset
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405
SM 31 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
B712 32 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Fax Option
Type 3245
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B712
B750S500.WMF
SM 33 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B712S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. (
4.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
• Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B712 34 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches)
Section 3.2 Bit Switches
1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
102 Ifax Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax
settings for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
103 Printer Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
104 Communication Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
105 G3-1 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
106 G3-2 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
107 G3-3 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the optional G3 board
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
108 G4 Internal Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
109 G4 Parameter Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
111 IP fax Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
parameters
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
SM 35 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
2 line.
B712 36 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Fax Option
Type 3245
105 PSTN-3 Port Settings
B712
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
3 line.
003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive
Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
106 ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 PSTN Access Number
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
004 Transmission
Disabled
107 IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port
002 SIP Port
003 RAS Port
004 Gatekeeper port
005 T.38 Port
006 SIP Server Port
007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SAP".
Priority
201 FAX SW
001 – 032 00 – 1F
SM 37 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5 Mode No. Function
101 Initialize SRAM
000 Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
104 Factory setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6 Mode No. Function
101 System Parameter List
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the system
parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the service
monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
001 G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications communications for all G3 lines.
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
103 003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
004 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.
005 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-2 line.
006 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-3 line.
007 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-3 line.
104 G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1 Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 Dch
003 Bch 1 Link Layer
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer
B712 38 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Fax Option
Type 3245
105 All Files print out
B712
000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
107 Log List Print out
001 All log files These log print out functions are for
002 Printer designer use only.
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
108 IP Protocol Dump List
001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the IP fax line.
002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the IP fax line.
SM 39 B712
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
B712 40 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
SM 41 B712
BIT SWITCHES
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -
16 to get the rx level.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM
B712 42 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
B712
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
“40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM 43 B712
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
B712 44 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
B712
7 Priority given to various types This bit determines which set of priorities the
of remote terminal ID when machine uses when listing remote terminal names
printing reports on reports.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM 45 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 46 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
B712
4 Type of TTI used for 1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
transmission using the ten-key destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
pad polling transmission and manual transmission using
0: TTI_1 the handset.
1: TTI_2
5-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
SM 47 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 48 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Communication after the This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
Journal data storage area has printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
become full report (e.g., no paper).
0: Impossible 0: If the buffer memory of the communication
1: Possible records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
1 Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
has become full during the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
scanning 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
0: The current page is erased. the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
0: All fax reception is disabled any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
1: Faxes can be received if the messages from senders that do not include an RTI
sender has an RTI or CSI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.
5 Address display priority in the 0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
AI redial mode telephone number information, the machine displays
0: RTI/CSI RTI/CSI.
1: Telephone number 1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings
SM 49 B712
BIT SWITCHES
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”
B712 50 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
I-fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-102-001
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original
Attachment File that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4 0: Off, 1: On
1 B4 NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to
2 A3 “1”, the larger size has priority. For example,
3-6 Reserved if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the
maximum size is “A3” (Bit 2).
7 Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the
receiving machine at the destination, so the sending
machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving
machine. The original width selected with this switch
is used as the RX machine’s original width setting,
and the original is reduced to this size before
sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.
0 200x100 Standard
1 200x200 Detail
2 200x400 Fine
3 Reserved
5-6 Reserved
NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the higher resolution has priority.
For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).
SM 51 B712
BIT SWITCHES
When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.
• When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and
“Subject” address are printed as header information.
• When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
B712 52 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
B712
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: “Dispatched”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“dispatched” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.
01: “Displayed”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“displayed” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
“00” (for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to “01” to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
4 Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used
7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.
SM 53 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 54 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
I-fax Switch 04 SP No. 1-102-005
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-007
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-008
SM 55 B712
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-011
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-012
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-013
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-014
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-015
B712 56 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed.
0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a “2” inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
1 Repetition of data when the 0: The next page continues from where the previous
received page is longer than page left off.
the printer paper 1: The final few mm of the previous page are
0: Disabled repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
1: Enabled repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
received fax messages - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 57 B712
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width
B712 58 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
1: Enabled to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
1-3 Not used Do not change the settings
4 Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
to
7 If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
SM 59 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 60 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the
0: Width received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
0: 8.5" x 11" size both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the
1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3 Printing the sample image on “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
to reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 0 The upper half “0” to enable this switch.
only Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
0 1 50% reduction this feature.
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
5-6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.
SM 61 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 62 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
1 Bit 1 0 Modes protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in transmit mode to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
3 Bit 3 2 Modes phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
4 Not used Do not change the settings.
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Reception occur using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Transmission occur using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the
0: Disabled other terminal does not match the ID code of this
1: Enabled terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
SM 63 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 64 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
B712
3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
negative code (RTN or PIN) is received.
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
transmission receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 65 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 66 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Number of digits compared to 00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
to find the requester’s fax number After the machine receives a transfer request, the
4 from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number sent
Quick/Speed Dials when acting from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
as a Transfer Station Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 67 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 68 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Communication Switch 16 SP No. 1-104-023
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
0: Not installed G3 unit.
1: Installed
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 69 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 70 SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
1 communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 71 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 72 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 73 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 74 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B712
G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 75 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 76 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
G3 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is off- If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
communication change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 77 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 78 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
SM 79 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 80 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
B712
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
Other settings - Not used
SM 81 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 82 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Protocol requirements: Europe The machine does not automatically reset these bits
0: Disabled 1: Enabled for each country after a country code (System
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Switch 0F) is programmed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
3 Protocol requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
4 PTT requirements: Germany
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5 PTT requirements: France
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM 83 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 84 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
IP Fax Switch 01 SP No. 1-111-002
B712
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Level 0 is the highest quality 0 0 0 0 Level 0
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0). 0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
4-7 combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
SM 85 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 86 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
IP Fax Switch 05 SP No. 1-111-006
B712
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for transmission
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0K bps
0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4K bps
0 1 1 1 16.8K bps
1 0 0 0 19.2K bps
1 0 0 1 21.6K bps
1 0 1 0 24.0K bps
1 0 1 1 26.4K bps
1 1 0 0 28.8K bps
1 1 0 1 31.2K bps
1 1 1 0 33.6K bps
SM 87 B712
BIT SWITCHES
B712 88 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3245
IP Fax Switch 08 SP No. 1-111-009
B712
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds). Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 35 sec
0 1 40 sec
1 0 50 sec
1 1 60 sec
If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
The default is "00" (75 seconds).
IP Fax Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-010
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-011
IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-012
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-013
IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-014
IP Fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-015
IP Fax Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-016
SM 89 B712
NCU PARAMETERS
B712 90 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3245
Address Function Unit Remarks
B712
680500 Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
SM 91 B712
NCU PARAMETERS
B712 92 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3 20 ms
Type 3245
B712
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-
OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
SM 93 B712
NCU PARAMETERS
B712 94 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
68055B International dial access code (High) BCD
Type 3245
For a code of 100:
B712
68055C International dial access code (Low) 68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68055E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
cadence detection enable flags 0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
SM 95 B712
NCU PARAMETERS
B712 96 SM
Rev. 10/2006 NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
6805AF Hz (BCD)
Type 3245
Acceptable AI short protocol tone If both addresses contain
B712
(800Hz) detection frequency upper FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency lower FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm SP2-103-002 (parameter
01).
6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N
signal detection level) (dBm)
6805BE Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805C6
6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.
Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805D9
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time for
bit 3 message 1: 30 s post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
⇒ 6805E4 Threshold for ring level Change bit 2 to 1
bit 2 This will increase the threshold for
ringing level detection.
⇒ 6805E4 On-Hook impedance level Change bit 3 0 to 1
bit 3 This will decrease the on-hook
impedance level
SM 97 B712
NCU PARAMETERS Rev. 10/2006
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
B712 98 SM
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
B712S104.WMF
SM 99 B712
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting often contains errors, the signal level may be
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 0 1 -1 communications with that terminal until the results
0 0 0 1 0 -2 are better.
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4 If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01
: setting is used.
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled left.
5 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting frequencies because of the length of wire between
7 0 0 0 None the modem and the telephone exchange when
0 0 1 Low calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 1 1 Disabled the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
B712 100 SM
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3245
Switch 03
B712
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always
to Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
3 0 0 0 0 Not used high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
0 0 0 1 2,400 bits.
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
0 1 0 0 9,600 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 16,800 left.
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600 If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 1 0 24,000 used.
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed copy
0 0 Inch-mm may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
conversion machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available
0 1 Inch only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
2 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
3 0 0 First DIS or transmission. The machine will then wait for the
NSF second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
SM 101 B712
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Switch 04
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end
0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
in transmit mode to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
6 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
0 0 Off the (0, 0) setting.
0 1 On Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
1 0 Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
1 1 Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
B712 102 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
SM 103 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B712 104 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Bit 4: Not used
B712
Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bits 2 to 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bits 4 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
SM 105 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B712 106 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3245
Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
B712
finisher)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, G3-3 and G4 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC fax (LAN fax) error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15)
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message
0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
SM 107 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B712 108 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B0(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4)
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4)
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4)
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 680296(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680297 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)-
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) - Hour
680385(H) - Minute
680386(H) - Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bits 0 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
SM 109 B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
B712 110 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Fax Option
Type 3245
6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main
B712
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number
SM 111 B712
OVERVIEW
FCUIF
MBU
to IPU
Memory DIMM
CCUDRV
GWFCU3
CCUIF
SG3 SG3
B712D501.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
B712 112 SM
BOARDS
5.2 BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3245
5.2.1 FCU
B712
SAF SDRAM DIMM FCU
BACKUP (16MB) (32 MB)
FCUIF
DMA BUS
IPU
PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS
v.34
SRAM FROM MODEM Line
(256kB) (3MB) NCU
Circuit
Speaker
TEL
BACKUP Drive
& RESET
MBU
CCUIF CCUDRV
G3 G3
Speaker
B712D502.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.
Modem (FAME)
• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
SM 113 B712
BOARDS
DRAM
• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory : 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory : 4MB
• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
• A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
• 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
• The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
B712 114 SM
BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
G3 Board
SG3-D
SG3-D
NCCP
CPU FROM SDRAM
(Ru30) (1MB) (8MB)
DPRAM
DMAC
FCU DCR
JBIG Line
DSP
CODEC AFE NCU
(modem)
+5V +3.3V
REG
B712D902.WMF
SM 115 B712
VIDEO DATA PATH
SCANNER
IPU
FBI FCU
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF SG3
NCU NCU
Analog G3 Analog G3
B712D511.WMF
B712 116 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
Fax Option
Type 3245
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
B712
format. The IPU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-
compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
• Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
• Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
• Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1
SM 117 B712
VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3.2 RECEPTION
Analog G3 Analog G3
NCU NCU
Modem Modem
QM-CODER
SAF DCR
Page Memory
FACE3
FBI
SG3 FCU
IPU
Printer
B712D512.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the IPU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialed by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the IPU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
B712 118 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Fax Option
Type 3245
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
B712
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take
place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.
Available protocol
Option Available Line Type
Combinations
Standard only PSTN G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3
SM 119 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Scanner Controller
Comoressed
MMR
Page
IPU
Memory
HDD
FCU
FBI
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B712D514.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
• When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
• The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
• Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
• Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
• Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as “FAX001”. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
• Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting “Print 1st page”, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
B712 120 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Mail Transmission
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Transmission
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
• With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
• The default compression is TIFF-F format.
• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
SM 121 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
• IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception
B712 122 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Auth. E-mail RX
Fax Option
Type 3245
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
B712
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
SM 123 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
B712 124 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Transfer Request
Fax Option
Type 3245
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
B712
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Transfer Request
Request by Mail
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01….
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.
SM 125 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
IFAXD919.WMF
B712 126 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
E-mail Messages
Fax Option
Type 3245
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
B712
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters
SM 127 B712
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
B712 128 SM
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Handling Reports
Fax Option
Type 3245
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
B712
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an “A” in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
sender’s journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with “OK” in the Result column.
• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E”
in the Result column.
• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” in
the Result column.
• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “How
to set up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
Report Sample
IFAXD921.WMF
SM 129 B712
IP-FAX
5.5 IP-FAX
What is IP-FAX?
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format
TCP is selected by default for NIC FAX; you can change this to UDP with LAN
switch 10 bit 1.
Settings
User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes
LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
B712 130 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Desktop type transceiver
Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Original Size: Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(single sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(double sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution: G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.
NOTE: Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required
Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR
JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
SM 131 B712
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard
Quick Dial 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall 500
Programs 100
Auto Document 6
Communication records for Journal stored in the
200
memory
Specific Senders 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
With the
Without the
Expansion
Expansion Memory
Memory
Memory
400 400
Transmission file
Maximum number of
page for memory 1,000 1,000
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission 320 2,240
(Note1)
B712 132 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Type E-mail File Format
Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Connectivity
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Local area network
format only
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) Protocol
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) (Supported by TCP/IP protocol)
Connection Transmission:
100base-Tx/10base-T direct SMTP, TCP/IP
connection Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Resolution
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi Data rate
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi 100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to “1” or "Full Authentication method
mode" in the address book of a SMTP-AUTH
client pc must be selected with POP before SMTP
Web Image Monitor. A-POP
Transmission Time Remark
1 s (through a LAN to the server) The machine must be set up as an e-
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document mail client before installation. Any
(Selerexe Letter) client PCs connected to the machine
MTF correction: OFF through a LAN must also be e-mail
TTI: None clients, or some features will not work
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi (e.g. Autorouting).
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
NOTE: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2
(A3) must be set to “1” or "Full
mode" in the address book of a
client pc must be selected with
Web Image Monitor.
SM 133 B712
SPECIFICATIONS
4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Network: LAN: Local Area Network
Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)
IP-Fax reception function: Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax
through a network.
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax
connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
B712 134 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
5. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[A] [B] [C]
[D]
PPC
[G]
[F]
[E]
B712V101.WMF
Machine
Component Remarks
Code
FCU [A]
MBU B712 [F] Included in the Fax unit.
FCU Interface [G]
Expansion Memory G578 [B] Option
CCU drive board [C]
Included in the optional G3
Interface Board B713 [D]
unit.
G3 Board [E]
Handset Type 1018 B433 USA only
Common with J-C1
Refill ink for stamp
Marker Type 30 H903
Common with J-C1
SM 135 B712